GA A V 60910

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (3.18 MB, 221 trang )

(1)<div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

English 6

Period 1,2 – hớng dẫn cách học

I. Mục tiêu chung của môn học TiÕng Anh.

- Hình thành và phát triển ở học sinh những kiến thức , kỹ năng cơ bản về Tiếng Anh
và những phẩm chất trí tuệ cần thiết để tiếp tục học hoặc đi vào cuộc sống lao động.

II. Mơc tiªu cơ thĨ.

- Học xong THCS , HS nắm đợc kiến thức cơ bản , tối thiểu và tơng đối hệ thống về
Tiếng Anh thực hành hiện đại, phù hợp lứa tuổi.

- Có kỹ năng cơ bản sử dụng T.Anh nh một công cụ gioa tiếp đơn giản dới các dạng :
Nghe - nói - đọc – vit.

- Có sự hiểu biết khái quát về văn hoá cđa c¸c níc sư dơng TiÕng Anh.

- Hình thành các kỹ năng học tiếng và phát triển t duy .Những kỹ năng này sẽ giúp
phát triển khả năng sử dụng tiếng mẹ đẻ và góp phần hình thành năng lực ngơn ngữ
tồn diện hơn cho học sinh.

III. CÊu trúc sách Tiếng Anh 6.

*Giáo viên giới thiệu cho học sinh:

- Cuốn Tiếng Anh 6 gồm 16 đơn vị bài học ( Units), mỗi bài học tơng ứng với một chủ
đề và đợc chia làm nhiều tiết học đợc phát trin theo trỡnh t cỏc ch .

- Chơng trình học trong năm:

Cả năm: 3 tiết. 37 tuần = 105 tiết
Kì I : 3 tiÕt. 19 tuần = 53 tiết
Kì II : 3 tiết. 18 tuần = 52 tiết

- Điểm : M: 1- 2 15’ : 3 V: 2 HK: 1

- Có đầy đủ trang thiết bị, dồ dùng học tập: Máy cát sét, tranh ảnh, đồ vật minh hoạ
cho các nội dung giảng dạy.

IV. Häc sinh:

- Học sinh phải là chủ thể của hoạt động học tập: có động cơ học tập đúng đắn, tích
cực & chủ động tiếp thu kiến thức, chăm chỉ hoạt động tham gia các hoạt động giao
tiếp, mạnh dạn tích cực & có chủ định, có sáng tạo sử dụng Tiếng Anh trong hoạt

động giao tiếp.

- Kết hợp hoạt động học tập trên lớp và làm bài tập ở nhà.

- Học sinh tham gia hoạt động học tập dới sự hớng dẫn của giáo viên.

1. Có đầy đủ sách vở, đồ dùng học tập phục vụ cho môn học Tiếng Anh 6.

( SGK, sách bài tập, sách bổ trợ và nâng cao, một số sách tham khảo, có thể dùng đài
băng để luyện nghe ở nhà)

V. C¸ch häc:

- Học đi đơi với hành, chăm chỉ học tập

- Đọc, nói Tiếng Anh rõ ràng, chính xác, đúng trọng âm.
- Viết rõ ràng, liền nét, đúng chính tả.

</div>
(2)<div class='page_container' data-page=2>

- Kết hợp hoạt động trên lớp và làm bài tập ở nhà và giao tiếp với mọi ngời trong thực
tế.

- Có kĩ năng cơ bản sử dụng Tiếng Anh nh một công cụ giao tiếp ở mức độ đơn giản
dới dng: nghe- núi- c- vit.

* Giáo viên giới thiệu với häc sinh mét sè c©u giao tiÐp b»ng TiÕng Anh thờng dùng
trong mỗi tiết học.

- Keep silent.
- May I go out?
- May I come in?

- Thank you./ Ok.

- Do you know?/ understand?
- Sit down, please.

- Stand up

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

Unit 1 : Greetings.

Period 3: A 1 – 4 (P.10- 11).

A. Objectives:

- By the end of the lesson, Sts wil be able to know how to greet with :

“ Hi / Hello” and to introduce yourself with “ I am…../ My name’s…..” . count
numbers from “ 0” to “ 5”

B. Teaching method:

T- Wc, H – H, individual/ pair work.

C. Teaching aids:

E.6 textbooks, poster, a tape, astereo.

D. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

</div>
(3)<div class='page_container' data-page=3>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

- T. checks sts’ tools
( textbooks, notebooks,
fountain pen, ruler….)

2. Presentation(30’ )

a.Pre- teach vocab:
Elicit from Sts,

- hello (v): xin chµo (mime)
- hi (v) : xin chao (mime)
- I (pro) (expl)
- “ oh” :0 four: 4
- one : 1 five : 5
- two :2 - three : 3
* Check vocab: R.O.R

b. Dialogue build.(A1.2)
- Set the scene

- Give the instruction
a, Lan: …….. I’m ………
Nam:…….. Nga.

b, Ba: Hello. My name…...

Nam: …… Nam.

* Make an exchange: T-wc,
H- H, open pairs, closed pairs
- Get sts to go to the board to
write the missing words.
* Concept check:

- Meaning:

- Form: Hi. I’m …

Hello. My name is….
- Use: để chào và giới thiệu
tên.

- Pronunciation.

c. Practise.( A3-4).

- Get sts to greet and
introduce each other.
* Dictation.

- T. reads some numbers then
ask Sts to listen and write
individually then pair
compare.

Three, five, four, oh, two,
one.

Four-five-three,
three-two-oh

+ Get some Sts to read out.
* Word cue drill: T. gives
instrction.

- Run through the cues:

Quang Ninh / 033 -Hue/054
Hai Phong/031 - Ha Noi/
04

Hai Duong /0320

- T. models: S1: Quang Ninh,
please?

S2: Oh –three
–three.

- Make an exchange : T –

-T – Wc

- Listen and give
the answers.
- Listen and
repeat then copy.

- Go to the board
and rewrite.
- Listen to the T.

- Practice .

- Go to the board
and fill

the missing
words.
- Listen and
repeat then copy.

- Pair work.
- Listen to the T
and write

the correct
answers

individually then

pair compairs.
- Listen to the T.
- Run through.

- Listen and
repeat.

- Practice.

Unit 1 : Greetings.

Period 3: A 1 – 4

(P.10- 11).

1-Vocabs

- hello (v): xin chµo
- hi (v) : xin chµo
- I (pro)
- “ oh” :0
- one : 1
- two :2
- three : 3
- four: 4
- five : 5

2. Dialogue build.(A1.2)

a, Lan: …. I’m …

Nam:…. … Nga.

b, Ba: Hello. My name….

Nam: …. … Nam.

Form:

- Hi. I’m …

- Hello. My name is…
- Use: để chào và giới thiệu
tên.

- Pronunciation.

</div>
(4)<div class='page_container' data-page=4>

Wc, H – H, open pairs, close
pairs.

3. Further practise.(5’ )

* Guessing game:

- T. gives instruction + check
0320 .

* Ex: S1: 0h – three –
three.

Nam: No.

S2: 0h – four.
Nam: No.

S3: 0h – three –
two – 0h.

Nam: Yes.

4. Homework(5 ) ’

- Learn by heart the new
words and some structures.
- Do Ex. 1, 2 (P.4)

- Prepare: A 5 -8 (P.2-13).

- Listen to the T.
- T – Wc.

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

Unit 1 ( Cont).

Period 4

: A 5 – 8 (P.12- 13)

A. Objectives:

- By the emnd of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice with “ How are you?”
– “I’m fine”.

to great each other and count numbers 6 – 10.

B. Teaching method:

T – Wc, H – H, individual / pair work.

C. Teahing aids:

E.6 textbooks, a tape, a stereo, poster.

D. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Warm up(5 ’ ): 
- Share the class into two
groups to play the game.

2. Presentation.(32 ’ ) 
a. Pre teach vocab:

Elicit from Sts.
- fine (a): khoẻ
- thank (v): cám ¬n

- Listen to the T.
- Play in two
groups.

- Listen and give
the answers.

Jumbled words.
- T. gives instruction.
+ w t o : two

+ e t e h r : three
+ i f e v : five
+ r o f u : four
+ e n o : one
+ h o : oh

Unit 1 ( Cont).

Period 4

: A 5 – 8

(P.12- 13)

1-Vocabs

</div>
(5)<div class='page_container' data-page=5>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

- miss (n): cô (trẻ)
- Mr (n): ông

- Mrs (n): bà, cơ (có gia đình)

* Check voacb: Slap the
board.

b. Practice

* Rub out and remember
dialogue.

- T. gives instruction.

 Ba Lan
Ba:…, Lan.

Lan:….….

Ba:… … you?
Lan:… fine….?
Ba: …,thanks.

*T. puts A5-P.12 on the board
and crosses out some key
words.

* Make sure sts have to
remember the rubbed out
words and keep practising the
dialogue.

- Get sts to practise reading.
- Ask sts to fill the missing

words.

* A6:

- T. sets the scene: this is Miss
Hoa, Mr Hung. They are
talking each other.

- T. models:

Mr Hung: Hi, ( Miss Hoa)
Miss Hoa: Hello, ( Mr Hung)
Mr Hung: How are you?
Miss Hoa: I’m fine, thanks.
And you?

Mr Hung: Fine, thanks.
* Concept check:

- Meaning.

- Form: How are you?
I’m (fine). Thanks.
- Use: Hỏi thăm sức khoẻ.
- Pronunciation.

* Get sts to practise.
* A7:

- Play the tape.( 2 times)

- Get sts to write the

information they’re listened
themselves to complete the
dialogue.

- Check with the w.c.

c. Pre- teach number:
Elicit from Sts.

six eight
ten

seven nine.

- Listen and
repeat then copy.

- Play in two
groups.

- Listen to the T.

- Practice reading.
- Go to the board
and fill the

missing words.
- Listen to the T.

- Listen to the T.
and repeat.

- Listen and give
the answers.
then copy.

- Practice.

- Listen to the T.
- Individual
writing and pair
compare.

- Give the
answers.

- Listen and give
the answers.
- Listen and

- miss (n): c« (trẻ)
- Mr (n): ông

- Mrs (n): bà, cơ (có gia
đình)

* Concept check:
- Meaning.

- Form: How are you?
I’m (fine). Thanks.
- Use: Hỏi thăm sức khoẻ.

* The telephone numbers:
8200294; 9504423;
720909; 7683045

</div>
(6)<div class='page_container' data-page=6>

-Check vocab: Matching.
* Practice: Dictation:
- T. reads some telephone
numbers:

8200294; 9504423;
720909; 7683045

- Get some sts to go to the
board and write them.
- Check with the w.c ( T.
reads).

* Word square:
- T. gives instruction:

Ask sts to find out the numbers
learnt.

3. Consolidation(5 ) ’
- Repeat all the structures

above again.

4. Homework(3 ).’

- Learn the numbers: 0-10
by heart.

- Practise asking and
answering about the
health.

- Do ex : 3,4 ( P5)

- Prepore the new leson.
B1-3

repeat.
- Individual
matching.

- Listen and write.
- Go to the board
and rewrite.
- Listen and
check.

- Listen to the T.
- Play in two
groups.

- Listen to the T.

- Write down.

* The numbers learnt.
F I V E G T O
S N T W O F N
E I G H T O E
O N X O E U V
T E N O N R E
T H R E E X S

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

Unit 1( Cont)

</div>
(7)<div class='page_container' data-page=7>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010
 By the end of the lesson , Sts will be able to great, count the numbers And talk
about “ us”.

B. Teaching method:

 T – Wc, H – H, pair/individual work

C. Teaching aids:

 English 6. textbook, poster….

D. Procedures.

Teacher’s activities Ss’activities Write on the board

1. Warm up(5 ’ ):

Chatting

- Get some pairs to play the
roles to greet each other and
introduce.

2. Presentation.(12’ )

a. Pre teaach vocab: Elicit
from Sts.

- Good morning/ afternoon/
evening/ night : Xin chµo.
- Good bye: T¹m biƯt

- Childen (n): những đứa trẻ.
- eleven : 11

- twelve: 12

- thirteen: 13.
- fourteen : 14
- fifteen : 15

* Check vocab: R. O. R.

b. Presentation dialogue :
 B 3 (P.15)
- T. gives instruction.

a. Miss Hoa: - - , children.
Children: - -, Miss Hoa.
Miss Hoa : - are - ?
Children : We’re - . Thank
you.

Miss Hoa: How - - ?
Children: Fine, - . - -.
b. Mom : - , Lan.

Lan : Good night, Mom.
* Make an exchange:

T – Wc,H – H, open pairs,
close pairs.

- Get some Sts to the board and
fill in the missing words.

+ Check with the Wc.

+ Answer keys:

a. Good morning, good
morning, How, you,fine,are
you,

thanks, Good bye., bye.
b. Good night,

* Make an exchange:

T – Wc, H – H, open/close
pairs.

- Get Sts to go to the board and
fill in the missing words.

- Pair work.

- Listen and give
the answers.

- Listen and
repeat then copy.
- Go to the board
and rewrite.

- Listen to the T.

- Practice.

- Go to the board
and fill the
missing words
- Give the
answers.

- Go to the board
and fill the
missing words
- Give the
answers and
repeat then copy.

- Listen to the T.

Unit 1( Cont)

Period 5: B 1

–

6 (P.14

–

16)

1.vocabs:

- Good morning/ afternoon/
evening/ night : Xin chào.
- Good bye: Tạm biệt
- Childen (n): những đứa
trẻ.

- eleven : 11
- twelve: 12

- thirteen: 13.
- fourteen : 14
- fifteen : 15

+ Answer keys:

a. Good morning/ good
morning/ How/ you/ fine/
are you/thanks/ Good bye/
bye.

b. Good night/

2+ Form:

- Good………

</div>
(8)<div class='page_container' data-page=8>

* Concept checking:
 + Meaning:

 + Form:
Good………
How are you?
We’re……

+ Use :

Chào và hỏi thăm sức khoẻ.

+ Pronunciation:

3. Practice (20’ ) :

1. Picture drill.

- T . gives instruction.
* T. modles:

S1: Good (morning)!
S2: Good (morning)!
- Get Sts to play the roles.

 2. Write : B4.
- T. give instruction.

- Get Sts to write the missing
words in 3’ individually then
pair compare.

- Ask Sts to go to the board to
fill the missing words.

+ Check with the Wc.

 3. Picture drill:
T. gives instruction.

7 + 8 / 10+2 /5+6 /7+5/ +8/3
+3

- T. modles : S1: Seven and

eight ?

S2: fifteen.
- Make an exchange: T – Wc,
H – H, open/ close pairs.

4. Production(6’ ):

Ordering vocab.
- T . gives instruction.

- T. reads and Sts listen to the T.
and write numbers :from 0 to 15
in their notebooks then order
the numbers.

* Check with the Wc.

5. Homework(2’ )

- Learn by heart the new words,
the numbers.

- Practice speaking E. with your
friends.

- Do ex.

- Prepare the new lesson :
C 1 – 4 . (P. 17-18)

- Listen and
repeat.

- Play the roles.
- Listen to the T.
- Individual
writing and pair
compare.

- Go to the board
and fill in the
missing words.
- Listen to the T.

- Listen and
repeat.
- Practice.

- Listen to the T.
- Individual work
then pair c

compare.
- Give the
answers.

- Listen to the T.

- Write down.

-How are you?
-We’re……

+ Use :

</div>
(9)<div class='page_container' data-page=9>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

Unit 1 ( Cont)

Period 6 : C 1 – 4 ( P.17 – 19)

A. Objectives:

 - By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice counting numbers from
16 to 20 and asking and answering with “ How old are you?” perfectly.

B. Teaching method:

 T – Wc, H – H , pair/ individual work.

C. Teaching aids:

 E.6 textbook, poster.

D. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Check up(5’ )

- write numbers :from 0 to 15 .

2. Warm up(3’ ):

Chatting.

3. Presentation.(7 ) ’
a. Pre teach vocab:

Elicit from sts.
- sixteen : 16
- seventeen : 17
- eighteen 18
- nineteen : 19
- twenty : 20

- How old……..? :….. bao
nhiªu ti

- This is …..: đây là..

* Check vocab: R. O. R

4.. Practice (23’ ):

a. Pelnamism.

- T. gives instruction.
Sixteen 16
seventeen 17

- Come to the
board to answer.
- T – Wc.

- Listen and give
the answers.
- Listen and
repeat then copy.
-Go to the board
to rewite the
words

individually.
- Listen to the T.
- Play in two
groups.

- Listen and give

Unit 1 ( Cont)

Period 6 : C 1 - 4 ( P.17 - 19)

1-vocab:

Elicit from sts.
- sixteen : 16
- seventeen : 17
- eighteen 18
- nineteen : 19
- twenty : 20

- How old……..? :.. bao
nhiêu tuổi

- This is ..: đây là..

Sixteen 16
seventeen 17
eighteen 18

nineteen 19

</div>
(10)<div class='page_container' data-page=10>

eighteen 18

nineteen 19
twenty 20

- Praise the winner.

b. Slap the board: Elicit from

Sts.

- T. gives instruction.

the answers.
- Listen to the T.
- Play in two
groups.

twenty 20

5 20 16 17
11

15 9 18 6

- Praise the winner.
c. Bingo : C 5 ( P.19)
- T. gives instruction.

*. C 3 (P.19)

- Set the scene.

- Play the tape ( 2 Ts)
- Get Sts to practice reading.
* The modles: S1: How old
are you ?

S2: I’m
( twelve).

* Concept check:
+ Meaning:

+ Form : How old + be+ S?
S + be+ number
( years old)

- Use: Hỏi và trả lời về tuổi.
- Pronunciation.

* Note: T. contrasts “ How
old are you?”with “ How are
you?”

*Practise: Picture drill.
- T. gives instruction:

12 20 18
11

19 13 15
- T. models:

- Get sts to practise.
- T. corrects if necessary.

5- Consolidation(5’ )

- Learn the number 0- 20 by
heart.

- Practise speaking English
with your friends.

- Prepare the new lesson:
C5-6 ( P.19)

6- Homework(2’ )

-Learn the number 0- 20 by
heart.

- Practise speaking English
with your friends.
- Prepare the new lesson:

C5-6 ( P.19)
eighteen : 18

- Write some
numbers , listen
to the T and shout
: “Bingo” if

win

- Listen to the T.

- Listen to the
tape and repeat.
- Practice reading.
- Listen and
repeat in chorus.
- Listen and give
the answers then
copy.

- Listen to the T.
- Run through.
- Listen and
repeat.

- Practice.

- Listen to the T.

- Write down.

2- model sentences

The modles: S1: How old
are you ?

S2: I’m
( twelve).

+ Form : How old + be+ S?
S + be+ number (

years old)

- Use: Hỏi và trả lời về tuổi

</div>
(11)<div class='page_container' data-page=11>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

Unit 1( Cont)

Period 7 : C 5 - 6 ( P.19)

A. Objectives:

 By the end of the lesson, sts will be able to practise with the number 1- 20

B. Language content:
 the numbers.

C. Teaching method:

 T – wc, individual/ pair work.

D. Teaching aids

 E.6 textbook, poster.

E. Procedures.

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Check up(5’ )

- write numbers :from 0 to 20 .

2. Warm up(3’ ):

- T. asks some questions and
gets sts to answer.

3. practice(30’ ):
a.Pelnamism:

- T. gives instruction.

Sixteen seventeen nineteen
Eighteen twenty

17 18 19
20 16

-Praise the winner.

b. Jumbled words.

- T. gives instruction.
tgeih: eight
neelve: eleven

lewtev: twelve
ntrenouef: fourteen
ytwnet : twenty
ientenne: nineteen

treniten : thirteen
evens: seven.

- Check with the wc.

c. Bingo: C5.( P19).

- T give instruction.
- Get sts to listen to the
teacher and say: “Bingo”.

d. Dictation and picture cue
drill.

- T. gives instruction and
checks.

- T. models:

S1: What’s your number?
S2: [ oh- five- one- one,

eight-- Come to the
board to
answer.
- Listen and
answer.

- Listen to the
answers.
- Play in two
groups.

- Listen to the
T.

- Group work.

- Give the
answers.
- Listen to the
T.

- T – Wc.
_ Listen to the
T. and give the
answers.

- Listen and
repeat.

- Run through.
- Practice.

cards

Unit 1( Cont)

Period 7 : C 5 - 6

( P19)

poster

treniten : thirteen
ytwnet: twenty
lewtev: twelve
tgeih : eight
neelve:eleven

ntrenouef: fourteen
ientenne: nineteen
evens: seven

S1:What’s your
number?

S2: [ oh- five- one- one, eight-
two- six- six, nine- nine]

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên11

Sixteen

seventeen
17

twenty
16

18 Eighteen
19 nineteen

</div>
(12)<div class='page_container' data-page=12>

two- six- six, nine- nine]
048214076
054845832

0320 721 353
033612300

031720909
0511826699

* Make an exchange: T –
Wc, H – H, open/close pairs.

e. Production:

* Survey: T. gives instruction.
Name Telephone

number.

1. Hoa 033612300
2.

3.
4.
5.

- T. models:

S1: What’s your name?
S2: ( Hoa)

S1: What’s your telephone
number?

S2: ( 033 612 300)

-T. gives limited times for sts
to fill in the grids.

- Check with the wc.

4. Consolidation(5’ )

- Vocabs of numbers

5. Homework(2’ )

- Pracrise speaking English
with your friends.

- Do ex 1,2,3,4 (P 7,8,9,10)
- Prepare the new lesson:

Unit 2(A1-4)

- Listen to the
T.

- Play in
groups.

- Listen and
repeat.

- Group work.
- Some pairs
- say out.
- Listen to the
Teacher.

- Write down.

S1: What’s your name?
S2: ( Hoa)

S1: What’s your telephone
number?

S2: ( 033 612 300)

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ………..………

Unit 2: At school.

Period 8 : A1-4 ( P.20- 22)

A. Objectives:

 By the end of the lesson, sts will be able to practise classroom imperatives to
understand the teacher’s commands.

B. Teaching method:

 T- wc, individual/ pair work.

C. Teaching aids:

 E6 textbook, poster. Tape, stereo,…

. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Warm up(5’ ):

Noughts and crosses.
-T. gives the instruction.

- Listen to the

</div>
(13)<div class='page_container' data-page=13>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Now, you play in two teams
one student from each team
choose the cell then count the
number in it other student has
to read out the result.the team
has the correct results which
in a line first is the winner
- Praise the winner.

Play the game

in two teams. 1+55+4 11+19+6 5+153+2

3+5 7+7 2+8

Unit 2: At school.

Period 8 : A1-4

( P20 - 22)

2. Presentation(5’ ):

a. Present vocabs:

Elicit from Sts.

Come in :đi vào>< go out
( mine)

Sit down >< standup
( mine)

- Open > < close ( your book)
* Check vocab: R. O. R

b. Present the text (A1 -P.20)

- Set the scene.(picture)
Now, look at these pictures
and tell me where they are,
who this woman is, who these
children are.

- Play the tape ( 2 Ts).

- Get Sts to listen and practice
reading.

- Listen and
guess the
meanings
- Listen and
repeat then
copy.

- Go to te
board and
rewrite
Look at the
pictures, listen
to T and
answer the
questions.
- Listen to the
tape and
repeat.

1.vocabs:

Come in : (v) đi vào go out (v)
Sit down: (v) ngåi xuèng

Stand up : (v)đứng dậy
Open :(v) mở

Close: (v) gÊp(s¸ch)

3. Practicc(20 ’ )

a. Matching A 2 ( P.21)

- T. gives the instruction.
Now, look at the pictures,
read the imperative sentences
then match the sentence with
its correct picture

- Get Sts to match the pictures
with the imperative sentences
individually then pair

compare

- Ask Sts to go to the board to
match individually

b. Mime drill:

- T. mimes:

( Open your book.)
( Stand up)

( Come in)……

c. Simon says:(a3-p22)

- T. get ss to play the game in
2 teams.

Now, listen to me carefully ,If
I say “Simon say :stand up”
you quickly stand up, If I say
“ Stand up” you keep sitting.

- Practice
reading.
- Read the
imperative
sentences,
then match the
pictures with
the imperative
sentences
individually
then pair
compare
- Listen to the
T then do as
teacher’s
mime

Listen to the
instruction.
Play the game
in 2 teams

2.Practice

-Match the pictures with the
imperative sentences

Answer key

 Picture a-Open your book

 Picture b-Sit down

 Picture c-Come in

 Picture d-Close your book

 Picture e-Stand up

4. Further practice(8 ). ’

* Mapped dialogue:
- T. gives instruction.
Miss Hoa
children

Listen to the
dialogue then
fill in the
missing words

2 Mapped dialogue:

Miss Hoa

children

… .morning
....morning,miss Hoa.

</div>
(14)<div class='page_container' data-page=14>

… .morning!
..morning,miss Hoa.
- How……..?
We’re….How…….?

- Fine,…….Sit… Yes,
miss!

- And open ……! Yes,
miss!

5. Consolidation.(5’ )

- The imperative sentences.

6. Homework(2’ )

- Learn by heart the vocabs.
- Do ex. : 1, 2 (P.11)

- Practice speaking E with
your friends.

- Prepare new lesson: B 1 -3.
(P.23- 24)

- Listen to the
Teacher.

- Write down.

- How……..?

We’re….How…….? - Fine,
.Sit Yes, miss!

…… …

-And open …… Yes, miss!

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

Unit 2 ( Cont)

Period 9 : B1-3 (p23-24)

A.Objectives.

 By the end of the lesson, sts will be able to practise asking and answering :
“Where do you live?”

B. Teaching method:

 T- wc, pair/ group work.

C. Teaching aids:

 E.6 textbook, poster.

D. Procedures.

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Check up (5 )’

- The imperative sentences.

2. Warm up(3’ ):

* Simon says. ( T. gives
instruction)

Now, listen to me

carefully ,If I say “Simon
say :stand up” you quickly
stand up, If I say “ Stand up”
you keep sitting.

- Come to the
board to answer.
- Listen to the T.
- St – Sts.
Listen to the
instruction.
Play the game in
2 teams

Unit 2 ( Cont)

Period 9 : B1-3

(p23-24)

3. Practise(23’ )

a. Presentation. : Present
vocab:

- Elicit from Sts.

( to) live (expl)
( in) a house ( realia)
( on/in) a street ( visual)
( in) a city ( visual)
* Check vocab: Matching.

b. Present dialogue

- Set the scene

Now, look at this picture and

- Listen and give
the answers.
- Listen and
repeat then copy.
-Matching the
word with its
correct meaning

- Listen to the

1.Vocab:

(to) live (v) : sèng

( in) a house(n) :(trông) một
ngôi nhà

</div>
(15)<div class='page_container' data-page=15>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

tell me who this girl is,and
who this boy is.What are
they talking about?

- Play the tape ( 2 times)
- Get sts to practise speaking
in chorus then individually.

c. Present structure

- T give model sentences
?What does the girl ask Nam
when she wants to know
nam’s house and how does
Nam answers

Checking concept

situation.
- Listen to the
dialogue.

Practice speaking
in chorus.

Practice speaking
individually.
- Listen and
answer the
question.

“where do you
live”

“ I live on Tran
Phu Street”
Listen and read

the model

Copy.

2. Model sentences
-Where do you live?

on Tran Phu treet.
- I live in a house.
in a city
in Hue

………..

Use:

Dùng để hỏi và trả lời về nơi ai
đó đang sống.

*Word cue drill.

- T. gives instruction.

Now, look at these phrases
of places, listen to me and
answer the question

“where do you live”
T. models first

- T: Where do you live?
( holding the phrase “in a
city.”

- S: I live in a city.
*Make an exchange:

T- wc, S- S, open pairs, close
pairs.

*Sing the alphabet song
(B3-P24)

T uses the song to present
the English alphabet

Listen to the
instruction.
Listen to the
model

T- wc, S- S, open
pairs, close pairs.

Listen and
repeat.

3-Practice.

(wordsheet)

1. a city
2 . Ho Chi Minh city.
3. a house
4. Le Loi street
5. Ha Noi
6. Hung Vuong street
7. Tran Phu street.
- S1: Where do you live?
- S2: I live in a city

4. Production(7’ ):
a. .Find someone who

- T. give instruction.

Each student asks and fill
information about three
others.

-T. models:

What’s the question for
name?

What’s the question for age?
What’s the question for
street?

What’s the question for city?

-Get sts to take turns to ask
each other and fill in the
table.

5. Consolidation(5’ )

Listen to the
instruction.
Listen to T’
model

Go around class
and ask friends
to fill in the
table.

Name age village
Hoa 12 Nam

Thai

… … …

Ex:

Nam. What your name?
Hoa. My name is Hoa.
Nam. How old are you?
Hoa. I’m 12 years old.
Nam. Where do you live?

Hoa. I live in Namthai.

</div>
(16)<div class='page_container' data-page=16>

- Hỏi và trả lời về nơi ai đó
đang sống.

6. Homework(2’)

-Use the survey to write a
short dialogue about three

friends.

-Practise speaking Engkish
with your friends.
- Do Ex:1,2,3,4(p12,13)

Prepa
re the new lesson:B4-6

- Listen to the
Teacher.

- Write down.

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

Unit 2 ( Cont)

Period 10: B 4 - 6 ( P24- 25).

A. Objectives:

 By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice spelling their names

 Practice asking and answering and writing about personal, alphabet and
numbers.

B. Teaching teaching:

 T – Wc, H – H, individual / pair work.

C. Teaching aids:

 E. 6 textbook, poster.

</div>
(17)<div class='page_container' data-page=17>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010
1-Warm up(5’ )

Gets students to sing the
song of ABC

Sing the song of
ABC

2- Presentation(6’ )
a-Present vocabs:

Mime.
Vietnamese
Vietnamese

Checking vocabs: ROR

b- Present dialogue-B4-P25

Set the scene.

Now look at this picture, this
is Lan and this is Lan’

Teacher. Her teacher is
asking some information
about her

T plays the tape (2 times).
Get ss to listen and repeat
Get ss to pracise the
dialogue in

pairs

c- Present structure:

Rub out and remember
dialogue:

T writes the dialogue on the
board. Reads and get ss to
repeat, then T step by step
rubs the words in the

dialogue until none word left
Get ss to read the missing
dialogue in chorus then in
pairs

- Listen
Repeat

Go to the board
and rewrite
Copy

- Look at the
picture andlisten
to the situation

- Listen to the
conversation and
repeat in chorus
Practice the
dialogue in pairs

- Listen and
repeat
- Read the

missing dialogue
in chorus then in
pairs

Unit 2 ( Cont)

Period 10: B 4 - 6

( P24- 25).

1-Vocabs:

(to) Spell (v)- đánh vần.
How : Nh thế nào

It : nã

2- New structure

(Rub out and remember
dialogue: )

T: What’s your name?
St: My name is Lan.
T: How do you spell it?
St: L – A – N , Lan.

3. Practice(20 ): ’
a.. Word cue drill:

T gives instruction.

Now, I have some people’s
names, imagine they are
your names answer the
questions

* T. modles:

S1: What’s your name?
S2: My name is ( Tuan).
S1: How do you spell it/
(your name)?

S2: T – U- A – N, Tuan.
* Make an exchange : T –
Wc, open / close pairs.

- Listen.
Answer T’s
questions.
Practise asking
and answering
the questions
using the given
names

Tuan

Hai

Thao

Phuong
Hien

</div>
(18)<div class='page_container' data-page=18>

4-Production(7’ ): B5-P25

Now,write the answer in
your books.

5. Consolidation(5’ ):

- The alphabet
- Spelling name

6. Homework(2’ ).

- Practice speaking E . with
your friends

- Do ex.5,6(p13)- Prepare
the new lesson : C 1-2
(p.26-28).

- Write the
answers for the
questions .

- Listen to the
Teacher.

- Write down.

Questions:

1-What is your name?
2- How old are you?
3-Where do you live?

4-How do you spell your name?

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

Unit 2 ( Cont )

Period 11: C 1 ( P. 26 – 27)

A. Objectives:

 By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice with : This / That positive
statements and Yes – No questions to talk about people and things at school.

B. Teaching method:

 T- Wc. H-H, pair / individual work.

C. Teaching aids:

 E. 6 textbooks, a tape, a stereo, poster.

</div>
(19)<div class='page_container' data-page=19>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Check up (5’ )

- Read the alphabet.

2. Warm up(3’ ):

 Jumbled words.
- T. gives instruction.

1. evening.
2. street.
3. hello.
4. city.
5. name.
6. thirteen.
7. stand up.

 * Check with the Wc.

3. Presentation.(7 ) ’

 1. Present vocab: Elicit
from Sts.

Points at a student.
Now, I am a teacher.

This is our school.
This is our class.

Points at a desk.

Points at the nearest desk. “this is
a desk”

Points at the farthest desk. “that is
a desk”

* Check vocab: Matching.
Now go to the board and match
the word with its meaning.
* Check with the wc.

 Word Cue Drill:

Practice vocabulary and revise
“How do you spell it?

Now, look at this word and
answer my questions.

?What’s this in English ?
? How do you spell it?

 2.Present dialogues.
- Set the scene: T. gives the
picture: T. asks:

Who’ s this?
What’ s this?

- Play the tape. ( 2 Ts).
- Get Sts to practice reading.

 3. Model sentences:
Elicit the modle sentence from
Sts.

- This is my desk.

- That is my school.
- Is this your class?

- Is that you teacher?
Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.

4- Practice (23’ ):

 a. Picture drill: C1
(P.26-27).

- T. gives instruction.

Now, I have some pictures, you sit
in pairs and practice asking and

- Come to the
board to
answer.

- Listen to the
T.

- Play in two
groups.

- Listen and
guess the
meanings
- Listen and
repeat then
copy.

- Go to the
board and
match
Listen and
answer the
questions
-[a student]
-[s-t-u-d-e-n-t]

- Listen to the
model then do
the same with
the others.
S. anwsers:
-It s a student/
a teacher.
-It s a desk/a
school...
-Listen to the
coversation
-Practice
reading
- Listen and
repeat.

- Listen to the
T.

- Pair work.
-Perform in
pairs

1. v e e i g n n
2. e t e r t s
3. l l e h o
4. y i c t
5. m n e a

6. t e e t h i r n

7. n t s a t d p u

Unit 2 ( Cont )

Period 11: C 1

( P. 26 – 27)

1-vocab

- a student: häc sinh, sinh
viªn( realia)

- a teacher: giáo viên
- a school: trờng học
- a class: líp ( häc).
- a desk

- this: c¸i này, này.
- that: cái kia, kia

(Poster)

S1:Whats this in English?
S2: [a student]

S1: How do you spell it?
S2: [s-t-u-d-e-n-t]

A desk
A school

A student
A class

(Tape + stereo)

2-Model sentences:

- This is my desk.
- That is my school.
- Is this your class?
- Is that you teacher
Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t

(Pictures)

S1: Is this your( school)?
S2: No, it isn’t.

</div>
(20)<div class='page_container' data-page=20>

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

Unit 2 ( Cont’d)

Period 12 C 2 – 4 (P.28-29)

A. Objectives:

 - By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice asking, answering about
the names of things.

B. Teaching method:

 T – Wc, H- H, individual / pair / group work.

C. Teaching aids:

E.6 textbooks, a tape, a stereo, poster.

D. Procedures.

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Warm up(3’ ):

- Get some pairs of the Sts to
practice asking and answering
Use : Yes – No question in
pairs.

- Pair work.
Asking and
answering using
the structure:

Is this/that….?

2. Presentation(7 ). ’

 1.Present vocabs.: Elicit
from Sts.

- a door: cöa chÝnh
- a window: cửa sổ

- a board: cái bảng

- a clock: đồng hồ treo tờng
- a wastebasket: giỏ rác

Look at the
pictures/real
things and give
the meanings.
Listen

Repeat
Copy

Unit 2 ( Cont’d)

Period 12 C 2 – 4

(P.28-29)

1.Vocabulary.

- a door: cöa chÝnh

</div>
(21)<div class='page_container' data-page=21>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

- a school bag: cỈp häc sinh.
- a pencil: cái bút chì

- a pen: cái bút mực
- a ruler: cái thớc
- an eraser: hòn

* Check vocab: Matching.
- Get Sts to go to the board to
match individually.

 2. Model sentences.
(Teacher holds a pen and asks)
? What is this ?

(Teacher points at the door and
asks)

? What is that?

Now look at the model and give
me the form.

Checking concept

Go to the board
to match the
word with its
picture.

Answer the
question.
( it is a pen)
(it is a door)
Find out the
form

Copy.

- a window: cưa sỉ
- a board: cái bảng

- a clock: ng h treo tờng
- a wastebasket: giỏ rác
- a school bag: cặp học sinh.
- a pencil: cái bút chì

- a pen: cái bút mực
- a ruler: cái thớc
- an eraser: hòn tÈy

2. Model sentences.

What is this ? it is a pen

What is that? it is a door

 Form:

WHAT IS THIS?(hái vËt ë
gÇn)

THAT?(hái vËt ë
xa)

IT IS + A/AN + N(danh từ
đém đợc số ít)

3-Practice(20’ ).

 1. Picture drill : C 2
(P.28)

Gets Ss to look at the pictures
and answer the questions using
the structure above.

T asks-Ssanswer
Ss ask-T answers
Ss ask- Ss answer

4- Further practice(8’ ).

1. Now, you sit in pairs, asking
and answering about things

around you.

2. Noughts and crosses:
T. gives instruction.

Now, you play in 2 groups, a
student from each group
chooses the word and make
question “How do you spell this
word?”

Then a student from his/her
group must spell that word
correctly and his/her group gets
one point

The group has 3 points in a line
is the winner.

5. Consolidation(5’ ):

- What is this/that? and the
answer.

- Classroom vocabulary.

6. Homework (2’ ):

- Learn by heart the new words.
- Do ex. 1, 3 (P.14)

- Listen and
give the
answers.
-Look at the
pictures and
make the
questions
G1 ask-G2
answer
G2 ask-G1
answer

Pictures.

-Sit in pairs,
asking and
answering
things around
the class.
- Listen to the
instruction
- Play in two
groups.

- Listen to the
Teacher.

- Write down.

desk ruler door
clock classroo

m pen

pencil schoolba

g book

</div>
(22)<div class='page_container' data-page=22>

- Practice speaking English with
your friends.

- Prepare the new lesson: Unit
3 : A 1, 2

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

Unit 3: At home

Period 13: A 1-2 (P 30-31)

A. Objectives:

 By the end of the lesson, sts will be able to practise asking and answering with
“Wh” questions with “this, that, these, those” and living room vocab to talk about
things in the house.

B. Teaching method:

 T- wc, individual work, group/pair work.

C. Teaching aids:

 English 6 textbook, picture4, poster.E. Anticipated problem:

D. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Warm up(5’ ):
 Brainstorm.

Now, play in two groups, go
to the board and list the
classroom vocabulary.

2. Presentation(8’ )

 1. Pre-teach vocab:
Elicit from Sts.

- a house ( pictures)
- a living room ( pictures)
- a telephone ( pictures)
- a lamp (realia)

- a bookshelf ( pictures)
- an armchair ( pictures)
- a table (realia)

- a chair(realia)
- a stereo ( pictures)
* Check vocab: Slap the
board: Elicit them from the
Sts.

- T. gives instruction.

- Ask Sts to go to the board
to slap the board in two
groups.

-Praise the winner.

 2. Presentation text:

Play in two
groups.

Go to the board
and list the
classroom
vocabulary

A pen

G1 G2

-Look at the
pictures/ real
things and give
the meanings.
Listen

Repeat
Copy

Go to the board
play in two groups

Unit 3: At home

Period 13: A 1-2

(P 30-31)

1. Vocabulary.

- a house :(n) ngôi nhà
- a living room: (n) phòng
khách

- a telephone:(n) điện thoại
- a lamp: (n) bóng đèn

- a bookshelf: (n) kệ sách
- an armchair (n) ghế bành
- a table :(n) cỏi bn

- a chair:(n) cái ghế
- a stereo

classroom
vocabulary

điện
thoại

búng
ốn

ngô
i
nhà
cái
ghế

phòng khách

</div>
(23)<div class='page_container' data-page=23>

Giỏo ỏn Ting anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

- Get sts to repeat “Wh”
questions with “this, that…”

about the names of things.
* What’s this/ that?

It’s a table/ chair.
*What are these/ those?
They’re tables/ chairs.
=> chóng ta dïng “these”
thay cho “this” / “those”
thay cho “that” / “are” thay
cho “is”/ “they” thay cho
“it” khi danh tõ ë d¹ng số
nhiều.(đa số có s ở đuôi)
* Note:

a-> an ( before u,e,o,a,i)

3- Practice(25’ ):
 *Picture drill.
- T. asks sts to use the
pictures in A2 (P. 31) to
practise asking and
answering.

- T, models:
S1: What is this?
S2: It’s a pen.

S1: What are these?
S2: They are pens.

Now, sit in pairs, asking and
answering about things in
the picture.

4. Consolidation(5’ )

- What are these/those

 They are………….

5. Homework(2’ )

- Learn by heart the new
words.

- Practice asking and
answeringwith “Wh-Qs”
with your friends.

- Do ex. 1,2 (p.17, 18)
- Prepare the new lesson :
A3,4.

Listen and repeat
Sit in pairs ,
asking and
answering.

2.Model sentences

*What are these/ those?
They’re tables/ chairs.

=> chóng ta dïng “these” thay
cho “this” / “those” thay cho
“that” / “are” thay cho “is”/
“they” thay cho “it”khi danh
tõ ở dạng số nhiều.(đa số có
s ở đuôi)

* Note: a/an đứng trớc danh từ
đếm đợc số ít

a-> an ( before u,e,o,a,i)

- Listen and give
the answers.
- Pair working.

- Listen to the
Teacher.

- Write down.

Pictures

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

Unit 3 : At home.

Period 14: A 3 - 5 ( P. 32- 34)

A. Objectives:

 - By the end of the lesson , Sts will be able to practice speaking English about
family members.

B. Teaching method:

 T – Wc, H – H, pair/group/individual / team work.

</div>
(24)<div class='page_container' data-page=24>

C. Teaching aids:

 E.6 textbook, a tape, a stereo. Pictures.

D. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Ss’activities Write on the board

1. Check up (5’ )

- Make sentences with: What
are these/those………?

 They are………….

2. Warm up(3’ ):

 Noughts and crosses.
Now, you play the game in two
teams, choose the number then
make the question and answer
it. the team has the correct
results which in a line first is
the winner

+ T. modles: S1: What is
this?

S2: It is a TV.
- Praise the winner.

- Come to the
goard to
answer.
- Listen to T.
- Play in two
teams.

table A bookshelf A lamp
A

couch A telephone A television
A

chair An armchair A stereo

Unit 3 : At home.
Period 14: A 3 - 5

( P. 32- 34)

3. Practice (30 ): ’

 1. Pre teach vocab:
Elicit from sts.

- my
- his
- her
- your

* Check vocab: R.O.R

 2. A3:
Set the scene.

A. Pre reading:

* T / F statement prediction.
- T. gives instruction.

1- Ba is twelve years old and
he is a student.

2- Mr.Ha is a teacher.

3- Ba’s mother is Ngoc and
she’s a worker

4- Ba’s sister , Lan is a teacher.
5- There ar 5 people in BA’s
family.

+ Collect Sts’ ideas.

- Lisen and give
the answers.
- Listen and
repeat then
copy.

- Go to the
board and
rewrite the
words.

- Listen to the
T.

- Predict
individually
then pair
compare.

1- vocabs:
- my
- his
- her
- your
.

* T / F statement

1- Ba is twelve years old and
he is a student.(T)

2- Mr.Ha is a teacher.(T)
3- Ba’s mother is Ngoc and
she’s a worker(F)

4- Ba’s sister , Lan is a teacher.
(F)

5- There ar 5 people in BA’s
family.(F)

B. While reading:

* Check prediction:

- Ask Sts to read the text and
check with your prediction
( correct the wrong

sentences) individually then
pair

compare.

- Get feed back from the Sts

- Read the text
and check their
prediction.
- Give the
answers.

family/father
mother
brother/sister
family/father

</div>
(25)<div class='page_container' data-page=25>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Pre-speaking A4

* Dialogue built : T. gives
instruction.

- Ask Sts to practice reading
then go to the board and fill in
the missing words.

S1: - …………. that?
S2: It’s ………..
S1:

-……….her………..?
S2 : ………..Nga.
* Get Sts to play the roles and
practice the dialogue

- Listen and
read the
dialogue
Practice the
dialogue in
pairs

Dialogue built

S1: …………. …….that?
S2: It’s ………..
S1: ……….her………?
S2 : ………..Nga.

*. Word cue drill : T. gives
instruction.

+ Mrs. Nga / 35
+ Mrs. Ha / 40
+ Lan / 15
+ Mr. Tan / 55

+ Nam / 17

* Make an exchange: T- Wc,
H-H, open/close pairs.

- Asking and
answering using
the given

information

Example exchange

S1- Who is that?

S2-That’s hismother/father/…
S1-What’s his/her name?
S2-His/Her name’s Nga/Ha…

C- Production

Describe and Draw.

Get ss to draw their families
then sit in pairs asking and
answering with the

information.

4. Consolidation.(5’ )

Asking and answering about
names/ages/

Introduce some one

5. Home work(2’ )

- Describe about your family.
- Learn by heart the new
words.

- Prepare B1-2.

- Do ex. 3,4 (P.20-21).
- Prepare the new lesson :
B1,2(P.35-36).

- Describe and
Draw.

sit in pairs
asking and
answering with
the information.

- Listen to the
Teacher.

- Write down.

Ex:

Tam/55
S1-Who’s this?
S2-it’s my mother.
S1-What’s her name?
S2-Her name’s Tam
S1-How old is she?
S2-She is 55 years old

</div>
(26)<div class='page_container' data-page=26>

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

Unit 3 (Cont )

Period 15: B1 , 2 (P.35-36)

A. Objectives:

 - By the end of the lesson. Sts wil be able to practice counting numbers from 21
to 100

and pronunciation of plural nouns ( s/ iz/z) perfectly.

B. Teaching method:

 T- Wc, H – H, pair/ group/ individual work.

C. Teaching aids:

 English 6 textbook, poster, picturre 7,8

D. Procedures.

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Warm up(5’ ):
 Broard drill.
- T. gives instruction.

Now listen and answer the
questions by telling the alphabet
T points at the number and asks.
+ T. asks: What is number 9?

-“A”

+ The alphabets:

- Listen to the
T.

- Listen and
answer
Individually.

1a -2b-3c-4f-5g-6u-7o-8y-9p-10e

-11r-12w-13q-14z-15x-16v-17m

-18n-19d-20s-21c-22g-23l-24j

-25t

Unit 3 (Cont )
Period 15: B1 , 2

(P.35-36)

2. Practice(25’ )

 1. Pre teach vocab:
Elicit from Sts.

- thirty/ thirty-one……..
- forty/forty-one………….
- fifty/ thirty- one………..
- sixty/sixty-one…………
- seventy/seventy-one…….
- eighty/eighty-one………..
- ninetyninety-one…………
- one hundred

One hundred and one:
.

………

- a bench(n): ghÕ dµi
-benches.(sè nhiỊu

- Listen and
give the
answers.
- Listen and
repeat then
copy.

Listen, read
then go to the

1-vocabulary

- thirty/ thirty-one……..
- forty/forty-one………….
- fifty/ thirty- one………..
- sixty/sixty-one…………
- seventy/seventy-one…….
- eighty/eighty-one………..
- ninety/

ninety-one…………

- one hundred

One hundred and one:
- a bench(n): ghÕ dµi
-benches.(sè nhiỊu)

10 65
43

</div>
(27)<div class='page_container' data-page=27>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

* Check vocab: What and
where.

- Elicit the numbers from Sts.
- Praise the winner.

board and
rewrite

- Listen and
give the
answers.
- Go to the
board and play
in two groups.

 2. Practice.

a. Snake and Ladders.
- T. gives instruction.
b. Realia drill.

- T. gives instruction.

Gets ss to look carefully things
around class then telling them
- T. modles:

S1: There is (one ) door.
S2: And there are (five) desks.

………..

3.Further practice(8’ ):
 a. Dictation lists:

- T. gives instruction: Get Sts to
listen to the T. and write the
pronunciation into three
groups: /s/ iz/ z/

+ T. reads:

Desks, rulers, benches,

students, tables, books, clocks,
couches, doors, windows,
houses, lamps.

+ Check with the Wc.

+ Notes: How to add and read
“s”.

4. Consolidation(5’ )
- Numbers to hundred.
- Plural nouns and their
pronunciation.

5. Home work(2’ )

- Learn by heart the count

numbers 21-100 and how to add
and read “s”

- Do ex.: 1,2(P.21)

- Prepare the new lesson: B3,5

- Look

carefully things
around class
then telling
them.

S1: There is (one ) door.

S2: And there are (five)
desks.

………..

- Listen to the
T.

- Listen and
write “s” into 3
columns:

/s/,/z/,/iz/then
go to the board
to write.

- Listen to the
Teacher.

- Write down.

/s/ /iz/ /z/
desks bench

rulers
studen

ts couches tables

books houses doors
clocks windo

ws
lamps

</div>
(28)<div class='page_container' data-page=28>

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

Unit 3 : (Cont)

Period 16 : B 3 - 6 (P.37)

A. Objectives:

 By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice with “How many… …are
there…?” questions and answer .

 Futher practice in numbers to talk about things in the classroom, the livingroom
and the family.

B. Teaching method:

 T-Wc, H – H, individual/group/pair work.

C. Teaching aids:

 E.6 textbook. Poster, picture 9

D. Anticipated problems:

- Some weaker Sts may get difficulty in grammar.

 Solution: T. and strong Sts help them.

E. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Check up (5’ )

- Numbers to hundred.

2. Warm up(3’ ):
 Chain game:
- T. gives instruction.

Now, work in group of 4, use
the information you have filled
in B2 page 36 to describe your
classroom

- T. modles:

S1: There is one door.

S2: There is one door and one
window

S3: ………

- Come to the
board to answer.
- Listen to the
instruction
- work in group
of 4, use

“there
is/are…….”
to describe the
classroom

Ex:

S1-there is one door.

S2-there is one door and one
window

S3-there is…………

Unit 3 : (Cont)

Period 16 : B 3 - 6

(P.37)

1- Modle sentences:

-How many doors are
there?

desks
benches

- There is one./ There are two.

3. Presentation(7’ )

 1-Presentation text-B3:
- Gets Sts to listen to the
dialogue and repeat.
- Plays the tape (2 Ts).

- Get Sts to practice reading.

 2- Modle sentences:
Elicit from Sts.

-How many doors are there?
desks

benches

- There is one./ There are two.

- Listen to T.
- Listen to the
dialogue and
repeat.

- Practice
reading.
- Listen and
give the
answers.
- Listen and
repeat then
copy.

4. Practice(15’ ) 2-Practice

</div>
(29)<div class='page_container' data-page=29>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010
 Picture drill : B 2 (P 36

); B 5 (P.37)
- T. gives instruction.

Now look at the pictures then
ask and answer the questions
using the model above

+ T. modles: S1: How many

desks are there?

S2: There are six.
- Get Sts to look at the pictures
(P.36) to practice asking and
answering , use “ How
many…….?”

- Listen to T.

- Listen and
repeat.

- Pairwork.(look
at the pictures
then ask and
answer the
questions)

S1: How many desks are
there?

S2: There are six.

5-Production(8’ )

 Survey: B 4
- T. gives instruction.

Now ask your friends to get
some information about his/her
family

+ T.models:

S1: How many people are there
in your family?

S2: / Three./

S1: How many armchairs are
there in your house?

S2; / Two/.

- Get Sts to practice in

groups( write the information
Into the grids.)

6. Cosolidation(5’ )

Question with “how many……”
Answer with “ there are……..”

7. Homework(2’ ).

- Practice speaking E. with your
partner.

- Do ex. 3,4 (P.22)

- Prepare the new lesson : C 1,
2. (P.38-39)

 Survey B4

Lan: How many people are there in your 
family?

Nam: Three

Lan: How many chairs are there in your house?
Nam: Two

In your

family? In your house?

In your
classroom

?
Na

me People Chairs Lamp
s

Tab

les Tvs Desks Windo
ws

m 3 2

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

Unit 3 (Cont’d)

Period 1 7: C 1 - 4 (P.38-39)

A. Objectives:

 By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice reading a text and
understand the details and talk about jobs.

B. Teaching method:

 T – Wc, H – H, pair/group/individual work.

C. Teaching aids:

 E.6 textbook, a tape, a stereo, picture 10, 11.

. Procedures.

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

</div>
(30)<div class='page_container' data-page=30>

1. Check up(5’ )

-Question with “how
many……?”

Answer with : there are……

2. Warm up(3’ )
 Write it up

- Ask Sts to go to the board
and write 5 sentences
(from survey).

+ Eg: There are three people
in Nam’s family.

- Come to the
board to answer.
- Two Sts go to
the board and
write.

Unit 3 (Cont’d)

Period 1 7: C 1 - 4
(P38-39)

3. Pre reading(5 )’

 1.Pre teach vocab:
Elicit from Sts.

- an engineer: kü s
(translation)

- a doctor: b¸c sÜ
(explanation/picture)
- a nurse: y

t¸(explanation/picture)
* Check vocab : R.O.R

 2. Networks:
T. gives instruction.

Now,play in 2teams, go to the
board and write the vocabs of
“job” the team which has
more correct words is the
winner

 3 . Open prediction:

Set the sence(Picture)

Now, look at this picture! This is
Lan

and her family, now you work in 4
groups to predict some information
about

her family.

- Collect sts’ ideas.

- Listen and give
the answers
- Listen and
repeat then copy.

- Go to the board
and rewrite.
- Listen to the T.
- Play in two
groups.

- Listen to the T.
-Work in 4
groups to predict
the information
about Lan’s
family

1- Vocabulary.

-an engineer:(n) kü s
- a doctor: (n) b¸c sÜ
- a nurse:(n) y tá
-What does he/she do?
(bà/ông ấy làm nghề g×?)
Ex:

S1. What does your father do?
S2.He is a teacher.

Student
Team1 Team2

- Lan’s family

Members How

old….? What does he
/shedo?
Father

Mother
Brother
Lan.

4. While reading(20’ ):

Now open your books page
38 then read the text and
check your prediction!

Correct the false information.
+ Check with the Wc.

Read the text
and check the
prediction
- Give the
answers.

- Read and check
their prediction.

 * Answer keys:

+ Father: forty an enginee
+ Mother : thirty-five /a
teacher

+ Brother: eight /a student
+ Lan: twelve / a student.

2- Comprehension questions.

a g c

</div>
(31)<div class='page_container' data-page=31>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

 *Comprehension
questions

Noughts and crosses.
- T. gives instruction.

Now work in 2 teams, read
the text again then disccuss to
find out the answers for the
questions on page 38

+ Praise the winner.

- Give the
answers.

- Listen to the T.
-Groupwoking
- Play in two
teams.

h b e
i f d

 * Answer keys:
a-There are 4

b-He is 40

c-He is an engineer.
d-She is 35

e-She is a teacher
f-He is 8

g-He is a student
h- They are in their
livingroom

i-(How many telephones are
there in Lan’s livingroom?
-There is one.

5 Post reading(5’ ).

 1. Word cue- picture
drill: C 2 - P. 39

- T. gives instruction:

- Get Sts to talk about Song’s
family.

+ T. modles:

* Make an exchange : T –
Wc, H – H, open/close pairs
- Get Sts to write some

sentences about Song’s
family.

+ Ex:

_ Song is a student and he is
twele.There are four….
- This is mr Kien, He’s a
doctor. He’s 42 years old….

6. Consolidation(5’ )

- To be/wh-questions

7. Homework(2’ ):

- Learn by heart the new
words.

- Write a passage about your
family.

- Do ex.1, 2, 3 (P.23-25)
- Prepare the new lesson :
Grammar practice.

- Listen to the T.
- Asking and
answering in

pairs

- Write it up .

- Listen to the
Teacher.

- Write down.

Ex:

S1: How many people are
there in Song’s family?
S2: There are four.
S1: Who is this?
S2: It is Mr. Kien.
S1: …….

</div>
(32)<div class='page_container' data-page=32>

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

Period 18: Grammar practice (P.40-43)

A. Objectives:

 - By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to further practice in :”Be”,

 imperative, numbers, question words, there is/are, and furniture vocab.

B. Teaching method:

 T- Wc, H-H, pair/individual work.

C. Teaching aids:

 E. 6 textbook, poster.

D. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Warm up(5’ ):

Chatting. - T – Wc.

Period 18: Grammar

practice (P.40-43)

2. Practice(33 ). ’

 a. “ Be”
* Gap fill:

Grammar practice 1,2,3 (p.40)
- Get Sts to do exercises

individually then pair compare.
* Noughts and crosses.

- T. gives instruction.
- Praise the winner.

 b. Imperatives:
Grammar practice 4 (P.40)
- Get Sts to play the roles :
“Simon say”

 c. Question words.
*. Gap fill:

Grammar practice 6 (P.41)

- One Sts repeat
how to use of “ to
be”

- Individual work
then pair compare.

- Listen to the T.
- Play in two
teams.

- Listen to the T.
Do as teacher says

 1- Gap fill
Answer key:

Ex1:am/am/are/is/are
Ex2:am/is/is/are/are
Ex3:a-are/am

b:is/is
c:is/is not
d:are/are not

They/
teache
r

We/
Stude
nts

She/
a
nurs
e
He/an

engine
er

I /
astud

ent.

They
/
sister
s
You/1

2 We/broth

</div>
(33)<div class='page_container' data-page=33>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

- Give a poster 6 (p.41) on the
board and give the instruction.
- Get Sts to fill in the missing
words individually then pair
compare then go to the board
to fill in the table.

- Check with the wc.
*. Answer given:
+ Gives the instruction:

- Get Sts to look at the answers
given and then make the

questions.

*Check with the Wc.

+ Get Sts to make the questions
for the answers above.

- Check with the wc.
1. How old is Song?

2.How many people are there
in Song’s family?

3. What is his father’s name?
4. How old is Song’s father?
5. What does his father/he do?
6. What is his mother’s name?
7. How old is she?

8. What does his mother do?
9 .What is his sister’s name?
10. What does he do?

 4. Numbers :
Bingo.

- T. gives instruction: Ask Sts
to choose 5 numbers from 11 to
19 and the decimals 20, 30,

. 100.

…

- T. reads: seventeen, seventy,
forty, twelve, one hundred,
thirty, sixteen, eleven, thirteen,
fifty, eighty, ninety, eighteen,
fourteen, twenty, fifteen,
sixteen, nineteen.

 5. Furniture:

- Get Sts to do ex. 10 on page
43 individually.

* Crossword puzzle.
- T. gives instruction

- Get Sts to play the game in
groups.

S2: No, it isn’t.

* T/ F repetition drill ( Picture
B5 – P. 37)

- T. gives instruction : If it is
true, Sts repeat.

If it is
not true, Sts silent.

*T. reads:

1. There is a TV.

2.There are three stools.
3. There are four people.

4. There are 2 armchairs and 2

- Work

individually then
pair compar, after
that go to the b. to
fill

the missing
words.

- Listen to the T.
- Pair work.
- Give the
answers.

- Pair work.
- Give the
answers.

- Listen to the T.
-Take 5 numbers
- Listen and shout

“ Bingo” if win.

- Listen to the
T.and do ex.
- Listen to the T.
- Group work.
- T – Wc.
- Work
individually.
- Listen to the T.
- Listen and repeat
or silent.

+ repeat
+ silent
+ repeat.

Answers key:Ex:6
a-what/is

b-where/live
c-what/is
d-where/is

 2-Answers given:
Song is a St and he is twelve
. There are 4 people in
Song’s family: his father, his
mother, his sister and him.
His father’s name is Kien.

He is forty and he is a
doctor.

His mother’s name is Oanh.
She is thirty nine years old
and she is a nurse.

His sister’s name is Lan.
She is fifteen and she is a
student.

+ Answer keys:

1. 12 6. Oanh
2. 4 7 . 39
3. Kien 8. a nurse
4. 42 9 . Lan
5. a doctor 10. a

student

</div>
(34)<div class='page_container' data-page=34>

chairs.

5. There are 7 books.
6. There are 2 lamps.
7. There is one lamp.
8. There is a stereo and a
telephone.

+ repeat.

+ silent
+ silent
+ repeat.
+ repeat.

Answers key:Ex 10/43

c h a i r

L B

e r A s e R d O o r

S U O

S c L o c k

b o a R d E

O R

w i n d O w

3. Consolidation(5 )’

- Repeat al the structures above again.

4. Homework(2 ):’

- Revise what they have learnt to make the coming test.

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

Period 19

The first written test ( Time: 45’)

A. Objectives:

 - Check the knowledge which has been learnt to know how well Sts know about
the grammar, vocab, structures, understanding, ….

 - Sts do the test carefully, exactly,and clearly.

B. New lesson.

 - Hand out the photocopies.

</div>
(35)<div class='page_container' data-page=35>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

1. Ma trận đề:

Néi dung NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiĨu VËn dơng Tỉng sè:

KQ TL KQ TL KQ TL

I. Listening 5

2,5 5 2,5

II. Reading 5

2,5 5 2,5
III. Language

focus 10 2,5 10 2,5

IV. Writing 5

2,5 5 2,5

Tæng sè: 10

2,5 10 5 5
2,5

2. Néi dung bµi kiĨm tra

I. LISTENING: Listen to the passage and tick T (True) or F (False) to the following statements. (2.5
pts)

T F

1. There are six people in Lan’s family.
2. Lan’s father is an engineer.

3. He is 41 years old.

4. Lan’s mother is a teacher.
5. She is 43 years old.

II. READING: Read the passage and circle the best option (A, B , C or D) to complete
the sentences. (2.5 pts)

There are four people in Minh's family, his father , mother, sister and him. Minh’s
father is an engineer. Everyday he goes to work at 7 o’clock. Minh’s mother is a
doctor. She works in a hospital in the town. She goes to work at 6.30. Minh’s sister is
a student at Hanoi National University. She is twenty years old. Minh is twelve. He is
a student at Son Loc School.

1. There are __________ people in Minh’s family.

A. three B. four C. five D.six

2. His father is an __________.

A. worker B. driver C. engineer D.teacher
3. His mother goes to work at __________.

A. 6.30 B. 6.45 C. 6.50 D.6.00

4. Minh’s sister is __________ years old.

A. 12 B. 20 C. 22 D.21

5. Minh studies at __________.
A. Tran Phu

School B. Le Duan School C. Quang Trung School D.Son Loc school
III. LANGUAGE FOCUS:Match one question in column A with an appropriate
answer in column B. (2.5 pts)

A B Matching

1. What is your name? A. He’s forty.
1-2. How old are you? B. My name is Long.
2-3. Where do you live? C. There are fifty students.
3-4. What’s your father’s name? D. I am twelve.
4-5. How old is he? E. I’m fine, thanks
5-6. Where does he work? F.It’ my pen.
6-7. How many students are there in your

class? G. I live in Son Ly.

</div>
(36)<div class='page_container' data-page=36>

8.How are you? H. He works in Dong Hoi.
8-9.What’s that? I. They are pencils.
9-10.What are they? J. His name is Quan.
10-IV. WRITING:Suppose you are Nguyen Quoc Anh,. Write a short passage about

yourself, using the following suggestions. (2.5 pts)

 Name

 Age

 Living place

 Name of the school

 Class

 Number of students in the class

My name is Nguyen Quoc

Anh...

...
...
...

3. Đáp án và h ớng dẫn chấm

I. Listening

Tổng số 2,5 điểm. Mỗi câu đúng đợc 0,5 điểm.

1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5. F
Tapescript:

This is my family. We are in our living room. There are four people in my family: My
father , my mother ,my brother and me.This is my father. He is 40 . He is an engineer.
This is my mother .She is thirty- five. She is a teacher.My brother is eight. He is a
student .

II. Reading

Tổng số 2,5 điểm. Mỗi câu đúng đợc 0,5 điểm.

1/B 2/ C 3/A 4/ B 5/ D

III. Language focus

Tổng số 2,5 điểm. Mỗi câu đúng đợc 0,25 điểm.

1. B 2. D 3. G 4. J 5. A 6. H 7. C 8. E 9. F 10. I
IV. Writing

Tổng số 2,5 điểm. Mỗi ý đúng đợc 0,5 điểm.
(Suggestion)

</div>
(37)<div class='page_container' data-page=37>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

Period 20

Correcting the test

I. Listening

Tổng số 2,5 điểm. Mỗi câu đúng đợc 0,5 điểm.

1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5. F
Tapescript:

II. Reading

Tổng số 2,5 điểm. Mỗi câu đúng đợc 0,5 điểm.

1/B 2/ C 3/A 4/ B 5/ D

III. Language focus

Tổng số 2,5 điểm. Mỗi câu đúng đợc 0,25 điểm.

1. B 2. D 3. G 4. J 5. A 6. H 7. C 8. E 9. F 10. I
IV. Writing

Tổng số 2,5 điểm. Mỗi ý đúng đợc 0,5 điểm.
(Suggestion)

My name is Nguyen Quoc Anh. I am twelve years old. I live in Son Loc. I am a
student at Son Loc School. I am in class 6A. There are forty-five students in my class.

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

I. Mơc Tiªu: Gióp HS củng cố lại những kiến thức Từ vựng, Ngữ ph¸p.

HS nắm lại thủ thuật làm bài; và các kỉ năng: nghe, viết Tiếng Anh.
Qua kết quả, rút ra biện pháp khắc phục và hớng phụ đạo có hiệu quả.
II. Chuẩn Bị: Bài làm của HS; ỏp ỏn.

III. Tiến Trình Dạy - Học:

Phần 1

Đáp án và biểu điểm

</div>
(38)<div class='page_container' data-page=38>

Phần II: Nhận Xét chung

I. Ưu ®iÓm:

- Cơ bản HS nắm đợc phơng pháp làm bài.
- Nắm vững các cấu trúc:

- Mét sè em tiêu biểu làm bài rất tốt:

II. Tồn tại:

- Kĩ năng nghe nhìn chung cha tốt. Nhiều HS nghe đợc nhng lại đánh không đúng vào
cột theo yêu cầu,thành thử kết quả là khơng có điểm

- KÜ năng viết đoạn văn còn nhiều hạn chế

III. Nguyên nhân:

- Một số HS cha nắm vững cấu trúc câu.

- Khi làm bài các em khơng phân tích kĩ câu đã cho thuộc cấu trúc nào đã học, dẫn
đến làm mị mẫm và có những lỗi hết sức đáng tiếc.

- Vốn từ vựng của HS nhìn chung là ít, dẫn đến việc các em không hiểu nghĩa câu đã
cho, v lm sai.

IV. Biện pháp:

- Rèn luyện kĩ năng nghe nhiều hơn.
- Rèn luyện kĩ năng phân tích câu.

- Rèn luyện chữ viết.

- Làm giàu vốn từ vựng.

- Lp danh sách những HS yếu, có kế hoạch phụ đạo.

</div>
(39)<div class='page_container' data-page=39>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

Unit 4 : Big or small?

Period 21 : A 1 -2 (P.44)

A. Objectives:

 Reading a descriptionof a school with practice in possessive “s” to talk abaut
possessions.

 Reading a text about a school to understand details and get further practice in
numbers and school vocabulary.

B. Teaching method:

 T – Wc, H – h, individual pair group work.

C. Teaching aids:

 E.6 textbook, poster, picture 13 ,tape,stereo….

D. Anticipated problems:

 Weaker Sts don’t understand the details of the text.

E. Procedures:

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên39

Phong’s school

Thu’s school

</div>
(40)<div class='page_container' data-page=40>

Giáo án tiếng Anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Warm up(3’ ):
 Pelnanism

Play in 2 groups, choose the numbers and find the
Play in 2 groups, choose the numbers and find the
Play in 2 groups, choose the numbers and find the
Play in 2 groups, choose the numbers and find the

Play in 2 groups, choose the numbers and find the
Play in 2 groups, choose the numbers and find the
personal pronoun and its possessive pronoun

personal pronoun and its possessive pronoun
personal pronoun and its possessive pronoun
personal pronoun and its possessive pronoun
personal pronoun and its possessive pronoun
personal pronoun and its possessive pronoun
personal pronoun and its possessive pronoun
personal pronoun and its possessive pronoun
personal pronoun and its possessive pronoun
personal pronoun and its possessive pronoun

2. Pre reading(7 ). ’

 1. Pre teach vocab:
Elicit from the Sts.

- big (a): drawing and
explaination

- small (a): antonym
- in the country:( I live in
Tan Loc-I live in the
country)

- in the city: antonym
* Check vocab: R.O.R

 2. Pre- prediction:
- T. gives instruction.
We are going to read the
texts about Phong’s school
and Thu’s school, now sit in
2 groups predict by

matching the words(phrase)

 3.Present structure
Phong’s school is small.
Note: “’s” after a person
name

 4.Practice.
Word cue drill.

T-S
S-T
S-S

Ex: Is phong’s school small?
-yes, it is.

Listen to T’s
situation and
guess the
meanings.
Listen and
repeat.

Go to the board
and rewrite the
missing words.
Listen to the
instruction
Sit in 2 groups
,predict by
matching.

Go to the board
and do matching

Listen and
answer the
question

Ask and answer
the questions

Unit 4 : Big or
small?

Period 21 : A 1 -2

(P.44)

1- Vocabulary.

- big (a): to, lớn
- small (a): nhỏ

- in the country: ở n«ng th«n
- in the city: ở th nh thà ị
Poster.

Big small
Phong’s school

in the
country

In the city

Thu’s school

2-Dialoague build

Nam: -Is Phong’s school

small?

Hoa: -Yes, it is

Nam: -Is Phong’s school big?
Hoa: -No, it isn t ’

3-Practice

1.Phong’s school/small/v
2.Thu’s school/big/v

3.Phong’s school/in the city/x
4.Thu’s school/in the country/x

3. While reading(23').

 1.Check prediction.
Now read the texts and
check your prediction.

 2.Comprehension
questions:

A 2 (P.44)

+ Lucky numbers: T. gives
the instruction.

Now sit in 2 groups,read the
texts again then answer the

Read the texts
and check the
prediction
Sit in 2 groups,
read the texts
again then

discuss to find
out the answers
for the questions

Phong’s school:-small/in the
country.

Thu’s school:-big/in the city.

 Lucky numbers.

1 (2a ) 2ln 3(2b) 4(2c) 5ln 6(2d)
Answer key

2a-yes, it is
2b-no, it is not

2c-it is in the country
2d-no, it is not

Your His Thu’s

She
He

Her

I Thu My

</div>
(41)<div class='page_container' data-page=41>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

Unit 4 : Big or small?
Period 22: A 3-6 (P.44)

A. Objectives:

Reading a descriptionof a school with practice in possessive “s” to talk abaut
possessions.

Reading a text about a school to understand details and get further practice in
numbers and school vocabulary.

B. Teaching method:

T – Wc, H – h, individual pair group work.

C. Teaching aids:

E.6 textbook, poster, picture 13 ,tape,stereo….

D. Anticipated problems:

Weaker Sts don’t understand the details of the text.

E. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Warm up(5 )’

Dialoague build

Nam: -Is Phong’s school

small?

Hoa: -Yes, it is

Nam: -Is Phong’s school

big?

Hoa: -No, it isn t ’

2. Pre reading(5 )’

- Listen and
answer the

question and then
Ask and answer
the questions

Unit 4 : Big or small?
Period 22: A 3-6 (P.44)

1.Phong’s school/small/v
2.Thu’s school/big/v

3.Phong’s school/in the city/x
4.Thu’s school/in the

country/x
Poster.

</div>
(42)<div class='page_container' data-page=42>

1. Pre- prediction:
- T. gives instruction.
We are going to read the
texts about Phong’s school
and Thu’s school, now sit in
2 groups predict by

matching the words(phrase

3. While reading.

1.Check prediction.
- Now read the texts and

check your prediction.

2.Comprehension
questions:

A A3 (P.45)

+ Lucky numbers: T. gives
the instruction.

- Now sit in 2 groups,read
the texts again then answer
the questions by playing the
game “lucky numbers’’

4. Post reading:

3. Rewrite:

Ask st rewrite about
Phong’s and Thu’s school

5. Consolidation(5’ )

-number ; adjective .
- How many...are there ?

6. Homework(2’ )

- Learn by heart the new

words.

- Write a passage about your
school.

- Do ex in the Ex book
- Prepare the new lesson :
B1-5

- Listen to the
instruction
Sit in 2 groups
predict by
matching.

Go to the board
and do matching
- Read the texts
and check the
prediction.
Sit in 2 groups,

- Read the texts
again then discuss
to find out the
answers for the
questions.
- Practice.

- Listen to the

Teacher.

- Write down.

Big 8 classroomssmall

20 classrooms

900
students

In the city in the country
Phong’s school:-small/in the
country/8 classrooms/400
students

Thu’s school:-big/in the
city/20 classrooms/900
students.

Lucky numbers.
1ln/23b/33c/43d/5ln/63a

Answer key
3a-there are 8
3b-there are 400
3c-there are 20

- 3d there are 900

3. Rewrite:

Student rewrite about Phong’s
and Thu’s school.

Phong’s school

Thu’s school

</div>
(43)<div class='page_container' data-page=43>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

Unit 4 ( Cont)

Period 23 : B 1 – 5 (P.47-48)

A. Objectives:

 By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice listening, cardinal

numbers, Ordinal numbers and “Which” questions to talk about school perfectly.

B. Teaching method:

 T- Wc, H- H, pair/ individual work.

C. Teaching aids:

 E. 6 textbook, poster.tape,stereo,….

D. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Check up (5’ )

- number ; adjective .
- How many...are there ?

2. Warm up(3’ ):
 Network
- Get ss to play in 2

teams, go to the board and
list what involve their
school

- Give feedback

- Come to the
bpard to answer.

- Play the game
in 2 teams
Go to the board
and list what
involve the
school

14 classrooms

Team1 Team2

3. Pre-listening(5’ ):

 1.Pre-teach vacab:
Elicit from Sts.

- the first: 1st (expl…)

- the second: 2nd

- the third: 3rd

-the fourth= 4ththø 4

…

- the tenth: 10th

-have (example)
(to) have/has (v)-có

Where : Đâu, ở đâu
Which : Nào, cái nào
* Check vocab:

R.O.R.

2. Predict dialogue
Set the sence

- Now, look at the picture.
They are Thu and Phong,
They are talking about
their schools, before
listening I want you to
work in 4 groups read the

- T- Wc.
- Listen and
guess the
meanings

- Listen and
repeat then
copy.

- Go to the
board and
rewrite.

Unit 4 ( Cont)

Period 23 : B 1 – 5

(P.47-48)

1-Vocabulary

- the first= 1st –thø nhÊt

( the first floor-tÇng mét)
- the second= 2nd-thø hai

(the second floor-tÇng hai))
- the third=3rd-thø 3

-the fourth= 4ththø 4

…

- the tenth =10th-thø 10

-have (v) -cã

(to) have/has (v)-có
Where : Đâu, ở đâu
Which : Nào, cái nµo

Poster

Thu: Hello, Which grade are you
in?

Phong: I’m in grade… …(a)

Thu: And which class are you in?

Phong:… …(b) What about you?

Thu: I’m in grade ……(c),class…

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên43

</div>
(44)<div class='page_container' data-page=44>

uncompleted dialouge
then predict the missing
words.

- T. hangs the poster with
the uncompleted dialogue.
- Get sts to predict the
missing words then pair
compare.

* Collect Sts’ ideas.

- Listen

- Sit in 4 groups
and predict the
missing words

(d)

How many floors does your
school have?

Phong:…(e)It’s a small school.

Thu: My school has… …(f) floor
and my classroom is on
the…(g)…floor. Where’s your
classroom.

Phong: It’s on the…(h)…floor.

4. While listening(17’ ):

Now,listen to the dialogue
then correct your

prediction

Play the tape( 2 times)
Check with the w.c.
- Get ss to sit in pairs,
practice the dialogue
Call some pairs to
perform

* Grid: B2 (P.48)

- Now, look at the table,
read the dialogue between

Thu and Phong again then
fill in the table with the
information about them
and about you, too
* Check with the Wc.

- Listen to the
dialogue
- Predict
individually
then pair
compare.
- Sit in pairs,
practice the
dialogue
Perform the
dialogue
- Read the
dialogue again
then complete
the table with
the infofmation
about Thu,
Phong and
themselves.

2-Listen

Answerkey

a. 6 e. 2
b. 6A f. four
c. 7 g. second
d. 7A h.first

Poster (with answer key)
Grad

e Class Classroom’s floor
Thu 7 7C 2nd

Phon

g 6 6A 1

You

5. Post listening(10’ ).
 *Noughts and
crosses

Get ss to use the

completed table then play
the game noughts and
crosses.the team has the
correct questions and
answers which in a line

first is the winner

Teacher models

- S1: Which grade /class
is Thu in?

-S2: She’s in grade 6/
class 6A.

-S1: Where’s her
classroom?

-S2: It’s on the second
floor.

 *Descibe.
- Gets ss to use the

information from the table
and describe

Listen to the
instruction
- Listen to the
model

Play the game
in 2 teams

-Listen to T’
model

Sit in pairs and
descibe

Listen

Grad

e Class Classroom’s
floor

Thu 7 7C 2nd

Phon

g 6 6A 1st

</div>
(45)<div class='page_container' data-page=45>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

T models

Thu is in grade 7, class
7c, her school has 4 floors
and her classroom is on
the second floor

a-Presentation

*Dialogue Build
Set the sence

Thu and Phogn are talking
about their schools, now
listen to their dialogue
then fill in the missing
words

Teacher gives feedback
and correct answers

b- Practice

- Now, sit in pairs play the
roles of Thu and Phong
and practice with the
completed dialogue
- Calls some pairs to
perform the dialogue

 *Mapped dialogue
Set the sence:

This is Mai and this is
Tuan. They are talking
abot their school, now
listen to their dialogue

c-Further practice

Gets ss to work in pairs,
make a similar dialogue
themselves.

6. Consolidation(3’ )

- The cardinal numbers
and the ordinal numbers.

7. Homework(2’ )

- Learn by heart the new

Try to find out
the meaning
Copy

Go to the board
and rewrite
- Listen to the
dialogue then
find out the
missing words
Sit in pairs and
practice with
the completed
dialogue

- Get ready to
perform the
dialogue
- Listen to T
- Listen and
repeat.

- Sit in pairs
make their own
dialogue

- Listen to the
Teacher.

- Write down.

Dialogue Build

Thu: Is your school big?

Phong: No. It’s ………

Thu: How many floors……..it
have?

Phong: It …….two floors

Thu: Which class…….you in?

Phong: I…….in class 6A

Thu: Where …….your classroom?

Phong: It’s…….the first floor

*Mapped dialogue

Tuan Mai

-Is your school……..(big)?
-Yes,it……….(is).

-How many……..does it…..
(have)?

-It ……(has)3…….
(floors)

-……(which)class …..(are)you…..
(in)

- …..(I) am in ….
(class) 6c

-…..(where) is your…….
(classroom)?

-It …..(is) on the…….(third) floor

</div>
(46)<div class='page_container' data-page=46>

words.

- Practise speaking
English with your friends

- Do ex:B1+ B3 ( P.38/39)
- Prepare the new lesson:
B4-6.

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

Unit 4 (Cont)

Period 24 : C 1- 3 (P.49)

A. Objectives:

 By the end of the lesson,Sts will be able to practice talking about habitual
actions.

B. Language content:

 The simple present.

C. Teaching method:

 T-Wc, H-H, pair/group/individual work.

D. Teaching aids:

 Chalk, board,pictures,tape,stereo…

E. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Check up(5 )’

- The cardinal numbers and
the ordinal numbers.

2. Warm up(3’ )
 Chatting.

3 Presentation(7').

 1. Pre teach vocab:
Elicit from Sts.

- to get up: picture
- to get dressed: picture
- to brush (your) teeth: mime
- to wash (your) face: mime

- to have breakfast: picture
- to go to school: picture

 * Checking vocabs
Slap the board.
- T. give the instruction..

 2. Presentation text:
C 1 (P.49)

- Set the scene.

Look at this boy! Who is he?
Yes. he is Ba, these are what
he doas before going to school
Now, listen and repeat

- Come to the
board to answer.
- T – Wc.
Listen and give
the answers.
- Listen and
repeat then
copy.

Play the game
- Listen to the T.

He is a student.

Unit 4 (Cont)

Period 24 : C 1- 3

(P.49)

1- Vocabulary.

-(to) get up: thøc dËy

-(to) get dressed: mặc quần áo
chỉnh tề

- (to) brush (your) teeth: đánh
răng

- (to) wash (your) face: rưa mỈt
- (to) have breakfast: ăn sáng
- (to) go to school: ®i häc

</div>
(47)<div class='page_container' data-page=47>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

- Play the tape and ask Sts to
listen and repeat in chorus
- Get Sts to practice reading.

 * Modle sentences:
Elicit from Sts.

+ What do you do every
morning?

get up

I brush my teeth.
Have…………

Listen and
repeat

Listen and read
Copy

+ What do you do every
morning?

get up

+ I brush my teeth.
have…………..
+ V….

4 Practice(18’ )

 1- Word cue drill:
- T. gives instruction.
a. … get up

b. …. dressed.
c. … teeth.
d. …face.

e. …. breakfast
f. …. school
* T. modles

S1: What do you do every
morning?

S2: I get up.

S1: What do you then?
S2: ……

* Make an exchange:T-Wc,
H-H, open/close pairs

5. Production(5’ ).
 * Chain games:
- T. gives instruction.
-T. modles:

S1: I get up.

S2: I get up and I brush my
teeth.

S3: ……

6. Consolidation(5’ )

-The simple present tense with

some verbs

7. Homework (2’ ):

- Learn by heart the new
words.

- Write 6 sentences about your
routines.

- Do ex.1 (P.411)
- Practice speaking E. with

your friends.

- Prepare the new lesson: C
1-3 (P.24)

- Listen to the
T.

- Listen and
repeat.
- Practice
reading.
- Listen and
give the answers
Then repeat,
after that copy.
- Listen to the T.

- Run through.
- Listen and
repeat.
- Practice.

- Listen to the T.
- Play

individually.
- Listen to the
teacher.

- Write down.

2-Practice( cards)

a. …. get up

b. …. get dressed.
c. … brush my teeth.
d. …wash my face.
e. …. breakfast
f. …. go to school

S1: What do you do every
morning?

S2: I get up.

S1: What do you then?

S2: ……

S1: I get up.

S2: I get up and I brush my
teeth.

S3: ……

</div>
(48)<div class='page_container' data-page=48>

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

Unit 4 (Cont)

Period 25 : C 4 – 8 (P.50-51)

A. Objectives:

 By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice telling the time clearly and
exactly.

B. Teaching method:

 T-wc, H-H, pair/individual/group work.

C. Teaching aids:

 E. 6 textbooks, poster, picture 0f the clocks(16)

D. Anticipated problems:

 Weaker Sts forget how to read the numbers.

 Solution: T. and strong Sts help them.

E. Procedures:

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Write on the board

1. Warm up(5’ ):

 Chatting. T-Wc.

2. Presentation(8 ’ ).

 1 . Number dictation.
T. gives instruction.

Now listen and write the
numbers you hear.

T. reads:

One ten/ four thirty/ five

twenty/ three fifteen/ six
forty/

seven forty five/ ten thirty/
twelve twenty five/ eleveen
fifty/ two fifty five.

Check with the wc.

 2. Pre teach vocab:
Elicit from Sts.

the time:
( ten) oclock:
half:

past:

To be late for…
Check vocab: R.O.R

 3. Presentation
pictures :

*Dialogue build:
T. gives instruction.
T. modles:

+ What time is it?
+ It’s eight(o’clock)

ten fifteen.
half past ten.
Make an exchange: T-wc,
H-H, open/close pairs.

Listen to the T.
Listen and write
individually.

Give the answers.
Listen and give
the answers.
Listen and repeat
then copy them
into your

notebooks.

Go to the board to
rewrite.

Listen to the T.
Listen and repeat.

Unit 4 (Cont)

Period 25 : C 4 –

8 (P.50-51)

1-Vocabulary

- the time:thêi gian
- ( ten) oclock: 10giờ
- half:30 phút

- past: hơn, quá, qua

To be late for… muén, trÔ

2-Dialogue build:

</div>
(49)<div class='page_container' data-page=49>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010
3. Practice(20 ): ’

 1. Pictures drill.
T. gives instruction.
Now, look at the pictures
then ask and answer about
the time

T. modles: What time is it?
It is/ two ten./
T. corrects if necessary.

 2. Word cue drill: C 7
(P.51)

T. gives instruction.

get up/have breakfast/go to
school

go home/have dinner/do
homework

* T modles:

+ Make exchanges: T-Wc,
H-H, open/close pairs.

4. Further practice(5’ ).

- T. gives instruction.
Now, work in two teams,
play the game by asking and
telling the time

* T. modles:

5. Consolidation(5’ ):

- Asking and telling the time
- Asking about activities.

6. Homework(2’ ).

- Learn the new words by
heart.

- Practice telling the time
with a partner.
- Do ex. 4, 5, 6 (P.42-43)
- Prepare the new lessonUnit

5 : A 1-2.

Listen to the
instruction

Listen.

Listen and repeat.
Practice asking
and telling the
time

- Look at the
pictures and run
through.

Practice.

Listen to the T.
Run through.
- Listen to the
instruction

Listen to T’ model
Listen to the T.

Play in two teams.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Write down.

*Model

S1: What time do you get up?
S2: I get up at six o’clock.

S1: What time is it?
S2: It’s / six ten/

6.10 6.30 6.45
7.00 11.00 11.30
3.15 4.20 4.55

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

Unit 5 : Things I do.

Period 26 : A 1,2 (P.52-53)

A. Objectives:

 By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice the simple present tense
with “ I, he, she” to talk about daily routines perfectly.

B. Teaching method:

</div>
(50)<div class='page_container' data-page=50>

 T- wc, H-H, individual/group/pair work.

C. Teaching aids:

 E.6 textbook, poster, picturre 17.

</div>
(51)<div class='page_container' data-page=51>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher s activities’ Ss activities’ Content on the board

1. Warm up(8 ) ’
Guessing game.

- Write the things on the
board.

- Get a student to come to
the front and choose one of
the things

- Get the rest of the class to
guess what time it is. The

first student guesses the
time correctly comes up to
the front, chooses a new
time and the game cotinues

- Look at the
board.

- A student to
come to the front
and choose one of
the things.

- The rest of the
class to guess
which thing it is.
* Student1: What
time is it ?

* Student2: Is it 6
o’clock?

* Student1:Yes, It
is /No,It isn’t

Unit 5 : Things I do.
Period 26 : A 1,2

(P.52-53)
1. Revision:

- 6.00
- 7.10
- 9.15
- 8.30

2. Practice(30’ ):
Elicit vocabulary

 Explanation
 Situation
 Visual

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.
- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

-(to) do your homework: Lµm
bµi tËp ở nhà

- Every day : mỗi ngày.

- (to) play games : chơi trò
chơi.

Slap the board

- Put the English words of
on the board.

- Call two students of two
teams to the front of the
class.

- Call out one of the
Vietnamese translation in
loud voice.

Group works.

- Say the English
words .

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Run forward and
slap the correct
words on the
board.

- Continue until
students have
slapped all the
words.

Presentation text.

- Set the scene: Nga is
talking about her daily
routines.

- Let students to listen to
the cassette and answer:
What does Nga do every
day?

- Show them the difference
of the verbs when the
subject is the 3rd person

singular.

- Listen to the
teacher’s
explanation.
- listen to the
cassette and
answer:

She gets up, goes
to school...……

- Isolate the
model sentence
by answer the
teacher’s
questions.

2. Presentation: + Target language:
 Nga gets up, goes to school,
plays games, does her
homework

He/She + V(s/es) +……..

- Thông thường thêm “s” (gets
up,…)

- Tận cùng: s, x, o, sh, ch

theâm “es” (gets up, goes,
plays, does,…)

- Nói hoạt động hằng ngày
với chủ từ là he / she ( ngôi
thứ ba số ít )

Substitution drill

- Get students to repeat the - Listen to the 3. Practice : Every day I get up at 6.
51

Do your homework

Play games

Go to school

</div>
(52)<div class='page_container' data-page=52>

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

Unit 5 : Things I do.

Period 27: A 3, 4 (P.52-53)

I. Aim:

 Simple present tense “ Wh” questions with he and she to talk about other
people’s daily routines.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about other
people’s daily routines by using “ Wh” questions.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cards, textbook, chalk, board, pictures,….

</div>
(53)<div class='page_container' data-page=53>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher s activities’ Studentsactivities’ Content on the board

1. Check up(5 ’ )

vocabulary of routines
and simple present tense
with I, he and she.

2. Warm up(3’ ):
Survey

- Ask students to ask
and answer questions
about their daily
routines .

- Ask some students to

retell their partners’
daily routines.

- Come to the
board to answer.
- Listen to the
teacher.

- Ask and
answer

questions about
their daily
routines.

- Some students
retell their
partners’ daily
routines.

1.Revision:

Nam
e get up

have
brea
kf-
ast
play

gam
es
do
your
hom

e-work
Phu 5.30 6.05 4.30 7.25
…... … … ... ….

3. Practice(30 ’ ):
Elicit vocabulary

Visual

Explanation
Mine

Visual

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after
the teacher.
- Notice the
main stress
pattern.

- Write the new

words in their
notebooks.

Unit 5 : Things I do.

Period 27: A 3, 4 (P.52-53)

1- Vocabulary:

- (to) listen to music : nghe nhạc.
- (to) do the housework: làm việc nhà
- (to) read : đọc

- (to) watch TV : xem TV.

Ordering vocabulary

- Write the new words
on the board.

- Get students to copy
the words in their
books.

- Read a short passage
about Lan’s daily
routines.

- Look at the
board.

- Copy the
words in their
books.

- Listen to the
teacher and put
the words in the
correct order by
numbering
them.

+ Checking vocabulary:

Every morning, Lan gets up and
listens to music. In the afternoon, she
comes home and does the housework.
Then she watches TV. In the evening,
she does her homework and reads
books

Presentation text.

- Set the scene: Ba, Lan,
Nam and Thu are
talking about what they
do after school.

- Let students to read
the text.

- Ask students to
answer the questions ( a
– b )

- Let students isolate
the model sentences by
asking and answering
the questions.

- Listen to the
teacher’s
explanation.
- Read the text
about What Ba,
Lan, Nam and
Thu do after
school.

- Answer the
questions (a–b)
- Isolate the
model sentences
by asking and
answering the
questions.

2. Presentation: + Target language:

+ What does Lan do after school?
+ What does Ba do after school?
+ What does Thu do after school?
+ What does Nam do after school?
*Form

What+does +Tên /he/she+do....?
Tên/he/she+V(s/es)

- Hỏi ngời khác (ngôi thứ 3 số ít) làm
gì sau giờ học

Word cue drill
- Run through the cues.
- Hold up the first cues
and say the model
sentences.

- What does Ba do after
school ? - He watches
television.

- Do the same for the
second cue.

- Look at the
cues.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat it
chorally and
then

individually.
- Make the

3. Practice:

- Ba / watch television.

- Lan / do the housework.
- Nam / listen to music.

- Thu / read.

</div>
(54)<div class='page_container' data-page=54>

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

……….………

UNIT 5: THING I DO

Period 28: MY DAY (A5-7)

I. Aim:

 Help students know “Yes / No” questions of the simple present tense and short
answers to talk about daily routines.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about daily
routines by using “ Yes / No” questions of the simple present tense.

III. Teaching aids:

 Poster, chalk, board,….

IV. Procedure:

Teacher s activities’ Students activities’ Content on the board

1. Check up(5 ) ’

Wh- questions with he and
she.

2. Warm up(5’ )
 Pelmanism.
- Stick 10 cards on the
board so that the students
can only see the numbers,

make sure the words are
mixed up.

- Divide the slass into two
teams and ask students to
choose two numbers.
- Go on until the cards are
turned over.

- Come to the board
to answer.

- Look at the board.
- Listen to the
teacher’s
explanation.
- Work in teams.
- One of student in
each team chooses
any two numbers.
- Go on until the
cards are turned
over.

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10

1= watch
2= play

3= television
4= do

5= soccer
6= listen to
7= music
8= brush
9= homework
10= teeth

3. New lesson(30 ) ’

 Elicit vocabulary
Visual

Visual
Explanation

 Checking vocabs
Rub out and remember
-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.
- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

- Students repeat
chorally and
remember all the
English words.
- Call the English
words and write the
English words if
there is time.

UNIT 5: THING I DO

Period 28: MY DAY

(A5-7)

1-Vocabulary:

-(to)play volleyball: ch¬i bãng
chun

- (to) play football : chơi bóng đá
- Sports : thể thao

</div>
(55)<div class='page_container' data-page=55>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

 Dialogue build.
- Set the scene.

- Read the dialogue and
write few key words on
the board to help students
remember what the two
speaker in the dialogue
say to each other .

- Get students to write in
the missing words on the
board.

- Get students to isolate
the model sentence.

-Answer the
teacher’s question.
- Look at the board
and listen to the
teacher carefully.
- Reproduce the

dialogue from the
cues.

- Build the dialogue
until it is

memorized.
- Write in the
missing words on
the board.

2-Dialogue build.

+ Target language: A5(page 54)
Ba: What do Thu and Vui do after
school?

Lan: They play soccer.
Ba: Do girls play soccer?
L: Yes, they do.

Ba: Do you play soccer?
L: No, I don’t.

Ba: Does Nga play soccer?
Lan: No, she doesn’t.
*Form

-Do +you / they + V(inf)….?
+ Yes, I / they + do >< No, I /

they don t. ’

- Does he / she + V(inf)…….?
+Yes, he/she does >< No, he/she 
doesn t. ’

*Use

Hỏi ngời nào đó có làm việc gì đó
hay khơng và trả lời có hay khơng
( yes/no)

 True / False
Questions
-Answer Drill

- Let students listen to the
tape.

- Ask a Yes / No question
with the target structure
in it. The question is a
real question.

+ Do you play any
sports ?

- Let students answer
truthfully.

- Listen to the tape.
- Teacher – student.
- Answer the

teacher’s questions.
The answers are real
answers.

+ Yes, I do / No, I
don’t.

3. Practice : A6 ( page 55)

a) Do you play sports?
b) Do you watch television?
c) Do you do the housework?
d) Do you play volleyball?
e) Do you listen to music?
f) Do you read?

g) Do you do your
homework?

 Find someone who
- Put the table on the
board.

- Get students to get into
groups.

- Get students to ask each
other questions.

+ Teacher: Do you
watch TV?

+ Student (Lan): Yes, I
do.

- Correct if there are any
mistakes.

- Feedback.

4. Consolidation(3’ )

“Yes / No” questions of
the simple present tense

5. Homework(2’ )

- Vocabulary.
- Do you / they +

- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.
- Stand up and ask
each orther

questions. When

they find someone
who says “Yes” they
fill in the name.
They can’t fill in
someone’s name
more than once.
- Tell the teacher
what they have
found, e.g. “ Lan
watches TV ”.
- Listen to the
teacher.

- Write down.

4.Further practice:
Action Name
watches TV
… Lan
plays football
…

does the housework

…

plays volleyball

…

listen to music

…

reads

…

</div>
(56)<div class='page_container' data-page=56>

V(inf)..?-Yes/No.
- Does he / she +
V(inf)..?-Yes/No.
- Exercises in the
workbook from page 43

to 46.

- Unit 5: Thing I do –
MY ROUTINE - Lesson
4 : B1 - B3.

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

……….………

UNIT 5: THING I DO

Period 29: MY ROUTINE (BI – B3)

I. Aim:

 Reading a picture story about Ba’s daily routine to practice Simple present
tense.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand about Ba’s daily
routine to practice Simple present tense.

III. Teaching aids:

 Pictures , chalk, board,…..

</div>
(57)<div class='page_container' data-page=57>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher s activities’ Students’

activities Content

1-Warm up(5 ’ )

 Jumbled words
-Write numbers whose
letters are in disorder.

- Divide the class into two
teams.

- Ask students from each
team to go to the board and
write the correct words .

-Look at the
board.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Work in teams.
- Go to the board
and write the
correct words.
(One word, one
student).

- tislen = listen
- arde = read
- tchaw = watch
- pyla = father

UNIT 5: THING I DO

Period 29:

MY ROUTINE

(BI – B3)

2- New lesson

 Elicit vocabulary
Visual
Picture
Translation
Antonym
Situation
Situation

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.
- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- (to) take a shower : tắm vòi
hoa sen.

- (to) eat: ăn.

- (to) start: bắt đầu.

- (to) finish: kÕt thóc.
- (to) have lunch: ¨n tra.
- (to) go to bed: ®i ngđ

 Checking
What and where

- Elicit the vocabulary from
the students and write them
in the circles.

- Get students to repeat the
words including the rubbed
out words by pointing at the
empty circle.

- Students repeat
chorally and
remember all the
words.

- Go to the board
and fill in the
circles with the
right words.

 Predict Grid

- Set the scene: Ba is talking
about his daily activities .

- Have students copy the
table.

- Get students to guess about
Ba’s daily activities by
writing the time in figures.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Pay attention to
the teacher’s
planation.

- Students copy
the table.

- Guess about
Ba’s daily
activities by
writing the time
in figures.

B2 (page 57)

Action TimeBa Me
get up
go to
school
class start

class finish
have lunch
go home
go to bed

- Ask students to read the
text and check their
prediction.

- Ask students to reread the
text by themselves.

Substitution drill

- Get students to repeat the
question.

- Call out phrases to be
changed in the question:
+What time does Ba get
up?.

+ go to school.
- Do the same for the
seccond picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Read the text
and check their

prediction.
- Reread the text
by themselves.
- Listen to the
teacher and
repeat follow the
teacher.

- Make the
change and
repeat the new
question.

+ What time
does Ba get up?
+ What time
does Ba go to

2- While reading:

- get up: 6.00
- have lunch: 11.30
- go to school: 6.45
- go home: 5.00
- classes start: 7.00
- go to bed: 10.00
- classes finish: 11.15

 Reading comprehension
- What time does Ba get up?

- He gets up at 6.00

- What time does he go to
school?

- He go to school at 6.45
- What time does he have
classes?

- He has classes at 7.00
take a
shower
finish
eat
have
lunch
start
57

</div>
(58)<div class='page_container' data-page=58>

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

……….………

UNIT 5: THING I DO

Period 30: CLASSES ( C 1 -3)

I. Aim:

 School subject vocabulary with “ Have / Don’t have ” to talk about school
timetable.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be school subject vocabulary with “
Have / Don’t have ” and “Has / doesn’t to talk about school timetable to use
days of week vocabulary to talk about the weekly timetable .

III. Teaching aids:

 Poster ,chalk, board, pictures,…

IV. Procedure:

Teacher s’

activities

Students’

activities Content on the board

1. Check up(5 )’

- Use simple

present tense to
talk about daily
routine

2. Warm up(5’ )

Word Square

- Write the word of
the square on the
board.

- Tell the students
what the topic is
and how many
hidden words are
there.

- Get the students

- Come to the
board to answer.
- Look at the
word of the
square on the
board.

- Listen to the
teacher and
answer the

teacher
questions.

+ There are 19
hidden workds
- Come to the

Revision:

H O M E W O R K

S L I S T E N T

T D O P L A Y A

A G W O R K O K

R O N R E A D E

T W A T C H T E

T M U S I C V A

O F I N I S H T

</div>
(59)<div class='page_container' data-page=59>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

to come to the

board and circle
any words they can
see.

board and circle
any words they
can see.

3. New lesson(28’ )

Elicit vocabulary

Checking vocabs

 Ordering
vocabulary
- Write the new
words on the board
in the wrong order.
- Get students to
copy the words in
their books.

- Read a short
passage about a
timetable on
Monday.

- Listen to the

teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the
main stress
pattern.

- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

-Vocabulary:

- a timetable(n) : thêi khãa biÓu
- English (n) : tiÕng anh

- Math (n): toán
- Literature (n) : văn
- history (n): lịch sử
- geography (n): địa lý
- Monday : thứ hai
- Tuesday : thứ ba.
- Wenesday : thứ t.
- Thursday : thứ năm.
- Friday : thứ sáu.
- Saturday : thứ bảy.

- Sunday : chủ nhật
- Look at the

board.

- Copy the words
in their books.
- Listen to the
teacher and put
the words in the
correct order by
numbering them.

First We have literature. Then We
have geography. At eight forty We have
English and then We have Math .At ten
fifteen We have history. This is our
timetable on Monday.

Presentation text.
- Set the scene:
They are talking
about their

timetable.

- Ask students to
listen to the text

about the timetable.
- Isolate the model
sentences by
underlining the
model sentences
and asking students
some questions:
+ What ‘s this?
+ What comes
after…?

Predict dialogue
- Set the scene: Lan
is talking to Nam
about her

classmate.

- Put the dialogue
on the board. Some
of the words are
missing.

- Ask students to

- Listen to the
teacher’s
explanation.
- Listen to the
text about the

timetable.
- Answer the
questions (a–b)
- Understand of
the target

language in term
of meaning, use
and form by
answering the
questions.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Read the
dialogue.

- Guess what the
missing words
are.

- Understand the
model sentence.

+ Target language(C1)

+ I don’t have my timetable.
+ What do we have today?

+ It’s Monday today. We have English.
S + have + danh tõ( m«n häc)

S +do not have+danh tõ (m«n häc)

+. Presentation: + Target language: (C3)

Nga: When do we have history?

Ba:We have it on tuesday and thursday
Nga: When do we have math?

Ba:We have it on Monday , Wenesday
and Friday.

Nga: Does Lan have math on Friday?
Ba: No, she doesn’t have math on Friday.
She has it on Saturday.

S + has + danh tõ (m«n häc)
S + does not have + danh tõ (m. h)

</div>
(60)<div class='page_container' data-page=60>

guess what the
missing words are.
- Isolate the model
sentence by asking
students some
questions

+ Does Lan have

math on friday?
- Tell them about
the short form of
“does not”

- Ask students to
copy the notes and
memorize

- Answer the
teacher’s
questions:
+ No, she
doesn’t have
math on Friday.
She has it on
Saturday.

- Copy the notes
and memorize.

- S ( He, She )

- Has ( ‘s ) : Cã(Häc).

- Does not ( doesn’t ) have : Kh«ng
cã.(Kh«ng häc)

 Word cue
drill

- Run through the
cues.

- Hold up the first
cues and say the
model sentences.
+ What do we have
today ?
+ We have math .
+ What time does
it start?

+ It starts at (Seven
fifty).

- Correct their
mistakes.

4. Consolidation(5’ )

- Ask students to
learn by heart
vocabulary and “
have/don’t have” to
talk about the
timetable

5..Homework(2’ )

- Have them
prepare Unit 5 -
Lesson6 (Grammar
practice)

- Look at the
cues.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat it
chorally and
then

individually.
- Make the
sentence for
themselves.
- Practice in
pairs.

- Some pairs
practice in front.

2 Practice(C1+3)

- Math / 7.50 - Geography / 10.15

- English / 7.00
- Literature /8.30

- History / 9.35

Ly’s timetable

T 2 T 3 T 4 T 5 T 6 T 7
Toán Văn Vnă AV AV Vaờn

Toán Toán AV Sử Toán Vaờn

Văn AV AV Toán Văn

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the
teacher
suggests.
- Write down.

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

……….………

Period: 31

Grammar pracice

I. Aim:

 Further practice in simple present tense, Telling the time, Adjective with “ Be”,
Question words, School Subjects, Days of the week.

</div>
(61)<div class='page_container' data-page=61>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010
 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use grammar points above
fluently.

III. Teaching aids:

 Pictures, chalk, board, …..

IV. Procedure:

Teacher s activities’ Studentsactivities’ Content on the board

1- Warm up(3’ )

Picture drill

- Run through the

pictures.

- Hold up the first picture
and say the model

sentences:

+What time is it?
+ It’s six o’clock.
- Do the same for the
seccond picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

2. Practice(20 ):’

- Look at the
pictures.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat it

chorally and then
individually.
- Make the
sentence for
themselves.

- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs
practice in front.

a) 7.00 d) 12.00

b) 9.15 e) 1.45
c) 4.30 f) 8.50

Period: 31

Grammar pracice

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Gap fill

- Have students read
exercises 1, 7 on page 60,
61 and fill in the blanks
with the correct form of
the verbs.

- Work
individually.

- Read exercise 1,
2, 3.

- Complete the
sentences with the
correct form of To
be.

- Do exercises
orally.

1. Practice:

Simple present tense

1a) get/get, get/gets, get/get.
1b) do/have/have, does/have/has.
1c) do/go…, does/go/goes.
1d) do/wash/../does/wash/washes.
7 a)gets b)takes c)brushes d)has
e)goes.

Word cue drill

- Run through the cues.
- Hold up the first cues
and say the model
sentences.

- Is your { house } big ?

- Yes,it is / No, it isn’t.
- Do the same for the
second cue.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the
cues.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat it

chorally and then
individually.
- Make the
sentence for
themselves.

- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs
practice in front.

 (3) Adjectives:

- house.
- school
- city.
- country.

- street.
- family.

- living room.

Answers given
- Show students the
statements.

- Let students ask
questions.

- Ask them to work in
pairs

-Correct if there are any
mistakes

- Look at the
board.

- Read the
statements.
- Ask questions.
- Work in pairs.

 (4) Question words:
a. My house is on Mai Dich
Street.

b. It has two floors. e. N-G-A.
c. My name’s Nga. g. I’m in
grade 6.

d. I go to Cau Giay school.

</div>
(62)<div class='page_container' data-page=62>

Lucky numbers

- Write the numbers on the
board.

- Divide class into teams.
The teams take turn to
choose the numbers.
- Tell students that they
have to answer the
questions .

- Look at the
board.

- Work in teams.
- Take turn to
choose the
numbers.
- Answer the
questions.

(5) Classes:

1 2 3 4 5
6

1. c). When do you have
geography?

2. a) When do you have
literature?.

3. Lucky number.

4. d) Which classes do you have
on

Friday / Monday?
5. Lucky number.

6. b) When do you have math?

3. Consolidation(5 ’ )

- Ask students to learn by
heart vocabulary and
Simple present tense

- Have them prepare Unit
6 - Lesson 1:

Understanding the details

and practising country
vocabulary.

4..Homework(2’ )

- Vocabulary (from
lesson1 to 5).

- Simple present tense:
The time, daily routines,
school timetable and
weekly timetable.

- Unit 6: Places - Lesson 1
:A1 – A3.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as th teacher
requests.

- Write down.

Nought and crosses

- Put the grid on the board.
- Divide class into teams.

One is noughts (O) and
the other is Crosses (X).
- Two teams choose any
things in the boxes and
ask questions about what
things are .

- The team which has
three noughts or three
crosses on a line will win
the game.

- i) What time do you do
your homework?

- Look at the
board.

- Work in groups.
- One is noughts
(O) and the other
is Crosses (X).
- Choose any
phrases in the
boxes, ask and
ask questions
about what they
do … ( Use every
morning /

afternoon /
evening in their
questions ).

- Congratulate the
winner.

2.Further practice:

i e b

g d f

</div>
(63)<div class='page_container' data-page=63>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

KiĨm trA 15 phót

§Ị A §Ị B

1-Gạch chân đáp án đúng mà em chọn
1-Every morning, Lan (get/gets) up at

5.00

2-I (plays/play) soccer after school
3-She (watch/watches) TV every
evening

4-They (does not/ do not) listen to
music

5-(What/What time) do you get up?

1-Every morning, I (get/gets) up at 5.00
2-Hoa (plays/play) soccer after school
3-We (watch/watches) TV every evening
4-He (does not/ do not) listen to music
5-(What/What time) do you get up?

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

……….………

UNIT 6: PLACES

Period 32: OUR HOUSE (AI - 3)

I. Aim:

 Help students understand the details and practice country vocabulary.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the content of the

text and use country vocabulary fluently.

III. Teaching aids:

 Pictures, chalk , board , tape, stereo,…

IV. Procedure:

</div>
(64)<div class='page_container' data-page=64>

Giáo án tiếng Anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên
Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board
1- Warm up(5’ )

Shark’s attack

- Divide the class into two
teams.

- Ask each team for a letter
in the alphabet.

- Ask students from each
team to guess the word.
- The game countinues until
students find out the word.

- Work in
teams.

-Look at the
board.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Give a letter
in the alphabet.
- Have to try to
guess the word.
- Find out the
word.

flower

river
rice paddy

park

 

---H O U S E

2-New lesson(33’ )

Elicit vocabulary

 Picture
 Drawing
 Drawing
 Realia
 Situation
 Situation

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after
the teacher.
- Notice the
main stress
pattern.

- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- a lake : cái hồ.
- a river : con sông.
- Trees : cây cối.
- Flowers : bông hoa.
- a rice paddy : cánh đồng.
- a park : công viên.

What and where

- Elicit the vocabulary from
the students and write them
in the circles.

- Get students to repeat the
words including the rubbed
out words by pointing at the
empty circle.

- Students
repeat chorally
and remember
all the words.
- Go to the
board and fill in
the circles with
the right words.

flowers
river

lake
rice paddy

trees
park

Open prediction

- Show students the things
and ask: What’s near
Thuy’s house?

- Listen to the
teacher and
answer the
questions

+ a lake, a
river, a park…

A1 (page 62)

- a lake - a park

- a river - a rice paddy
- Trees - Flowers

2. While reading

- a lake - c

</div>
(65)<div class='page_container' data-page=65>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

……….………

UNIT 6: PLACES

Period 33: OUR HOUSE (A 4 - A 6)

I. Aims:

 Help students know town and country vocabulary for describing places where
we live.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use town and country
vocabulary to describe places where we live grammar points above fluently.

III. Teaching aids:

 Pictures and cassette , text books, chalk,…

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Contenton the board
1. Check up(5’)_

- Write the vocabulary.

2. Warm up(5’ )
 Bingo

- Put the table on the board.
-Ask students to choose any
four words in a, b, c and
copy them into their books.
- Let students listen to the
cassette.

- Come to the
board to answer.
-Look at the
board.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Choose any
four words.
- Put ticks next
to the words that
they listen to.

- Shouts

“Bingo”.

a) hotel

b) country

c) rice paddy

UNIT 6: PLACES
Period 33: OUR HOUSE

(A 4 - A 6)

3-New lesson(28’ )
Elicit vocabulary

 Situation
 Situation
 Situation
 Visual

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after
the teacher.
- Notice the
main stress
pattern.

- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- a town : thị trấn, phố.
- a village : làng, xã.
- a city : thành phố.
- the country : miền quê.

</div>
(66)<div class='page_container' data-page=66>

 Slap the board

- Put the Vietnamese
translation on the board.
- Call two students of two
teams to the front of the
class.

- Call out one of the
English words in loud
voice.

Group works.

- Say the
Vietnamese
translation .
- Listen to the
teacher.

- Run forward
and slap the

correct words on
the board.

- Continue until
students have
slapped all the
words.

 Picture drill

- Run through the pictures.
- Hold up the first picture
and say the model
sentences:

+There’s a hotel near our
house.

+ They are trees near our
house.

- Do the same for the
seccond picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the
pictures.

- Listen to the

teacher.

- Repeat it
chorally and
then

individually.
- Make the
sentence for
themselves.
- Practice in
pairs.

- Some pairs
practice in front.

2- Practice: A5 (page 64)

a) a hotel d) a lake

b) trees e) a
school

c) a river f) a rice
paddy

 Guessing game.

- Write the things on the
board.

- Get a student to come to
the front and choose one of
the things

- Get the rest of the class to
guess what time it is. The
first student guesses the

- Look at the
board.

- A student to
come to the
front and choose
one of the
things.

- The rest of the

- a park
- a hotel
- a river
- a rice paddy

Lµng, xÃ

thị trấn , phố
Miền quê
Thành

</div>
(67)<div class='page_container' data-page=67>

Giỏo ỏn Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

time correctly comes up to
the front, chooses a new
time and the game cotinues

class to guess
which thing it is.
* St1: What is
there near ………?
* St2: Is there a
park near………?
* St1:Yes, there
is / No, there
isn’t.

- a school

 Write it up

- Ask students to write 4 - 6
sentenses about their place.
- Do the model.

+ There is a hotel near
our house.

- Look at the
board.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Students to
write 4 – 6
sentenses about
their place
- Correct.

3-Further practice: - A5, page 64:

- a hotel - trees
- a river - a lake
- a school - rice paddy

4. Consolidation(5’ )

- Ask students to learn by
heart vocabulary and
Simple present tense.

- Have them prepare Unit
6 - Lesson 3: Reading a
text about where Minh

lives.

5. Homework(2’ )

-Town and country
vocabulary.

- A5, page 64:There is a 
hotel near our house.

- Unit 6: Places:B1 – B3.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the
teacher

requests.

- Write down.

</div>
(68)<div class='page_container' data-page=68>

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

……….………

UNIT 6: PLACES

Period 34: In the city ( b1-b3)

I. Aims:

 Reading a text about where Minh lives to understand town vocabulary and
prepositon of place.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand town vocabulary.

III. Teaching aids:

 Poster and Textbook

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

1. Check up(5’)

- Write the vocabulary
and Simple present
tense.

2. Warm up(3’ )

- Rub out & remember

dialogue.

- Set the scene.

- Put “ Play with words”
on the board .

- Rub out some of the
words .

- Come to the
board to answer.
- Practice saying
the dialogue.
- Remember te
rubbed out words

and keep

practicing it.

- Repeat the
rubbed out words
from memory.

Houses and parks,
Flowers and trees,
Lakes and rivers,
We love these.

UNIT 6: PLACES

Period 34:

In the city ( b1-b3)

3-New lesson(30’ )
Elicit vocabulary

 Translation
 Situation
 Situation
 Translation
 Picture
 Translation
 Situation

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.
- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- a store :(n) cửa hàng.

- a restaurant :(n) nhà hàng.
- a temple : (n)đền, miếu.
- a hospital :(n) bệnh viện.
- a factory : (n)nhà máy.

- a museum : (n)nhà bảo tàng.
- a stadium : (n)sân vận động.

 What and where

- Elicit the vocabulary

</div>
(69)<div class='page_container' data-page=69>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

write them in the circles.
- Get students to repeat
the words including the
rubbed out words by
pointing at the empty
circle.

remember all the
words.

- Go to the board
and fill in the
circles with the
right words.

 True / Fasle

Prediction

- Set the scene: Lan is
talking to Mai about
Minh.

- Now, read the
statements and guess
they are true or fasle.
- Ask students to write
True/ Fasle in their
books.

- Put attention to
the teacher:

- Read the
statements on the
board and guess
which statements
are true and which
are fasle.

-write T / F in
their books.

 B1 (page 66)

a) Minh lives in the country.

b) There are four people in his
family.

c) Their house is next to the
bookstore.

d) There is a museum near their
house.

e) Minh’s mother words in a
factory.

f) Minh’s father works in a
hospital.

- Ask students to read
the text and check their
prediction.

- Ask students to reread
the text by themselves.

 Lucky numbers

- Write the numbers on
the board.

- Divide class into
teams. The teams take
turn to choose the

numbers.

- Tell students that they
have to answer the
questions .

- Read the text
and check their
prediction.

- Reread the text
by themselves.
- Look at the
board.

- Work in teams.
- Take turn to

choose the

numbers.

- Answer the
questions.

2- While reading: B1, page 66:

a) F / d) T/ b) T

e) F/ c) F / f) F

Reading comprehension

1 2 3 4 5 6
7

1d) Minh’s house is next to a

store.

2 Lucky number.

3b) a restaurant , a bookstore, a

temple

4c) His mother works in a

hospital.

5 Lucky number.

6e) His father works in a

factory.

7a) …… and his family live in
the city.

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên69

A store

A temple
A
hospita
l

</div>
(70)<div class='page_container' data-page=70>

 Bingo

- Put the table on the
board.

-Ask students to choose
any four words in a, b, c
or d and copy them into
their books.

- Let students listen to
the cassette and correct.

- Read the words
in the table.

- Listen to the
teacher.

-Choose any four
words.

- Put ticks next to

the words that
they listen to.
- Shouts “Bingo”.

3-Post reading:

a) museum.

b) bookstore.

c) river.
d) street.

4. Consolidation(5’ )

- Ask students to learn
by heart town
vocabulary.

- Have them prepare
Unit 6 - Lesson 4:(B4):
Practising prepositions
of place.

5. Homework(2’ )

- Town vocabulary.
- B1 – B3.

- Unit 6: Places – IN

THE CITY - Lesson 3 :

B4.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the
teacher suggests.

- Write down.

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

……….………

UNIT 6: PLACES

Period 35: around the house ( c1-c2)

I. Aim:

 Help students know more prepositions of place: in front of, behind, to the left /
right of.

II. Objective:

</div>
(71)<div class='page_container' data-page=71>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010
III. Teaching aids:

 Cassette and pictures

IV. Procedure:

Teacher s activities’ Studentsactivities’ Content on the board

1. Check up(5’)

- Write the town vocabulary.

2. Warm up(3’ )
 Chatting

- Ask students some
questions about their class.
- Teacher – whole class.

- Come to the

board to

answer.

- Answer the
teacher’s

questions about

their class.
- Students –
Teacher.

- Where do you live?

- Is there a ………… near / next
to ……?

UNIT 6: PLACES

Period 35:

around

the house ( c1-c2)

3. New lesson(30’ )

 Elicit vocabulary

 Situation
 Situation
 Situation
 Visual

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after
the teacher.
- Notice the
main stress

pattern.

- Write the
new words in
their

notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- in front of : phía trước.
- behind : phía sau.
- a city : thành phố.
- the country : miền quê.

 Matching

- Put the Vietnamese
translation and English
words on the board.

-Ask students to match
English words with the
Vietnamese translation .
- Ask students to work in
teams.

Group works.

- Lookl at the

board.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Work in
teams.

- Come to the
board and
match English
words with the

- in - gaàn
- on - trong
- near - caïnh
- next to - treân

</div>
(72)<div class='page_container' data-page=72>

Vietnamese
translation.

 Presentation picture.

- Set the scene: We are
talking about a house.

- Point to the things and ask
them to tell the names of the
things around.

- Ask them to read by
themselves.

- Let some of the students
read aloud and give the
Vietnamese translation of
the words: well, mountain.

- Listen to the
teacher’s

explanation.
- Tell the
names of the
things around.
- Read the

text by

themselves.
- Some of
students read
the text aloud.

2- Target language:
 C1 (page 68)

Look at the house.

In front of the house, there is a

big yard.

Behind the house, there are
tall trees.

Behind the tall trees, there are
mountains.

To the left of the house, there
is a well.

To the right of the house, there
are flowers.

- Well: cái giếng - Mountain:
núi

 Picture drill

- Run through the pictures.
- Hold up the first picture
and say the model
sentences:

+Where are the
mountains?

+ They are behind the
house.

- Do the same for the
seccond picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the
pictures.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat it
chorally and
then

individually.
-Make the
sentence for
themselves.
- Practice in
pairs.

-Some pairs
practice in
front.

3. Practice:

a) mountains
d) flowers

b) trees
e) well

c) yard
f) house

 Matching

- Ask them to look at the
pictures.

- Let students listen to the
cassette and find the right
picture.

- Lookl at the
pictures.

- Students
listen to the
cassette and try
to find out

4. Further practice:

a) Which is Ba’s house? -
A

b) Which is Lan’s house? -
B

</div>
(73)<div class='page_container' data-page=73>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

which picture
is Ba’s, Lan’s
or Tuan’s
house.

4. Consolidation(5’ )

- Ask students to learn by
heart vocabulary and how
to describe the position of
the house.

Have them prepare Unit 6
-Lesson 6: Prepositions of
place to describe a street .

5..Homework(2’ )

- Prepositions of place.
- Position of the house.
- Unit 6: Places:C3 – C4.

- Take notes
and memorize
- Do as the

teacher

requests.

- Write down.

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

……….………

UNIT 6: PLACES

Period 36 : around the house ( c3-c4)

I. Aims:

 Where is … / are …? Questions answers with town vocabulary and

prepositions of places to describe a street.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “Where is … / are …?”

Questions and answers with town vocabulary and prepositions of place to describe
a street.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cassette and pictures

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ Content

</div>
(74)<div class='page_container' data-page=74>

activities

1. Check up(5’)

- How to describe the
position of the house.

2- Warm up(5’ )

* Picture

- Show the picture and tell
students to ask questiuons
and answer.

- Come to the
board to answer.

* Pair works

- Look at the
picture.

- Ask questions
and answer about
Thuy’s house.

- C1 (page 68)

UNIT 6: PLACES

Period 36 :

around

the house ( c3-c4)

3. New lesson(28 ) ’

 Elicit vocabulary

 Visual
 Visual
 Visual
 Visual
 Visual
 Visual
 Visual

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the

teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.
- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- the drugstore: hiệu thuốc
tây.

- the stoystore: cửa hàng đồ
chơi.

- the movie theater: rạp chiếu
phim.

- the police station: đồn cơng
an.

- the bakery: lò / tiệm bánh
mì.

- Between: ở giữa.
- Oposite: đối diện.

Rub out and remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat

chorally and

remember all the
English words.
- Call the English
words and write
the English words
if there is time.

+ Checking vocabulary:

Presentation text.

- Set the scene: They are
talking about their town.
- Ask students to listen to
the text about the town.
- Isolate the model
sentences by answering
the questions and:

+Where is the photocopy

- Listen to the
teacher’s

explanation.

- Listen to the
text about the
town.

- Answer the
questions.

+ Target language:
 - C3 (page 70)

+Where is the photocopy
store?

</div>
(75)<div class='page_container' data-page=75>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010
store?

+ It is next to the bakery. - Understand ofthe target
language in term
of meaning, use
and form by
answering the
questions.

- Hỏi vị trí.

Picture drill

- Run through the pictures.
- Hold up the first picture
and say the model
sentences:

+Where is the bakery? 
 + It is next to the movie
theater.

- Do the same for the
seccond picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

Guessing game.

- Write the things on the
board.

- Get a student to come to
the front and choose one of
the things

- Get the rest of the class to
guess what time it is. The

first student guesses the
time correctly comes up to
the front, chooses a new
time and the game cotinues

- Look at the
pictures.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat it
chorally and then
individually.

- Make the

sentence for

themselves.

- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs
practice in front.
- Look at the
board.

- A student to
come to the front
and choose one of

the things.

- The rest of the
class to guess
which thing it is.
* Student1: It’s
next to the movie
theater. What is
it?

* Student2: It’s
the police station.
* Student1:Yes,
That’s right.

3. Practice:

- C4 - a - (page 70)

a) bakery d)
bookstore

b) movie theater e)
toystore

c) police station f)
children

- C4 - b - (page 70)

1) It’s opposite the bakery.
2) It’s between the bakery
and the

drugstore.

3) It’s next to the bakery.
4) It’s opposite the

bookstore.

5) It’s next to the movie
theater.

Survey - Fill in their real 4.Further practice: C5 (page

</div>
(76)<div class='page_container' data-page=76>

- Get students to fill in their
real timetable (only the 5
subjects they have learnt in
English).

- Get them to practice in
pairs:

+ What’s in front of your
house?

+ A rice paddy.

- Feedback.

4. Consolidation(5’ )

- Ask students to review
vocabulary and Grammar
points (Unit4 – Unit6) ,
-Where is / are the ………?

It is…. / They are ……

5.Homework(2’):

- Vocabulary and Grammar
points (Unit 4 – Unit 6).

- Exercises in the

workbook from pa 60 to 63.

-FORTY-FIVE MINUTE 
TEST.

timetable (only
the 5 subjects they
have learnt in
English).

- Practice in pairs.
- Tell the teacher
what they have

asked their

partner,

e.g.“There is a
rice paddy in front

of Lan’s

house………

71)

N
a.
.

in
fr
o..

be
-h
in
d

op

p-os
ite

..l
ef
t 
of

ri
gh
-t 
of

- Review

vocabulary and
Grammar points .
(Unit4–Unit 6) ,

Total Out

Teaching :6a………

6b………

6c………
PERIOD 37 : TEST ON ENGLISH

I. Objectivies:

- Remark pupils’ knownledge and get mark into teacher’s book.

II. Teaching aids:

-Teacher: the questions for the test.
- Pupils : objects for learn.

III. Practice :

- Teacher give the questions to pupils and pupils do the test individually.
( Teacher hand out the photocopies )

Ma trận đề

</div>
(77)<div class='page_container' data-page=77>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

TN TL TN TL TN TL

Câu 1 8

0,25 8 2,0

Câu 2 4

0,5 4 2,0

Câu 3 4

1 44,0

Câu 4 4

0
,5

2,0
Tæng sè: 8

2,0 4 2,0 4 4,0 4 2,0 20 10

§Ị A

Full name:...

Class:...

I-Nghe và viết các số nghe đ ợc:(2 pts)

1- eleven 2- twenty 3- fifteen

4-thirty

5-fifty 6-twelve 7-twenty two 8-forty three

II-Khoanh tròn đáp án đúng mà em chọn (4.0 pts)

1. There …………nine hundred students in the school .

A.is B .are C.am D.to be
2. I ………….breakfast at 6.30 .

A. have B.has C.having D.to have
3. Do you …………. your face in the morning?

A. washes B.washing C. to wash D.wash

4. Minh ………….. to school at 6.40 .

A. go B.goes C.going D.to go
5. She ……….her teeth every morning

A.brushes B.brush C.to brush D.brushing
6. The toystore is between the restaurant ………the bakery.

A.but B. and C.to D.next
7. Lan has math and history ……… Monday .

A. to B.at C.in D. on

8.He ……….. breakfast at six .

A. having B.have C.to have D. has

III.Đọc đoạn văn sau, sau đó đánh (T) vào câu em cho là đúng; (F) vào câu em 
cho là sai( 2pts)

This is Minh .He is a student .He learns at ThaiThuy school in ThaiThuy
village .He gets up at six every morning .He leaves his house at six fourteen.The
school is near his house .His classes start at seven and end at eleven thirteen. He has
lunch at home at twelve o’clock .

</div>
(78)<div class='page_container' data-page=78>

1.He gets up at 5 o’clock every morning ………F…………
2.He leaves his house at 6.45 ………F…………
3.The school is near his house ……T………

4.He has lunch at school at twelve o’clock F

III.Trả lời các câu hỏi sau về bản thân em (Häc sinh tù tr¶ lêi) : ( 2 pts )

1. Which class are you in ?

...
2.What time do you get up ?

...
3.What do you do after school ?

...
4. How many people are there in your family?

...
§Ị B

Full name:...Class:...

I-Nghe và viết các số nghe đ ợc:(2 pts)

1- eleven 2- twenty 3- fifteen

4-thirty

5-fifty 6-twelve 7-twenty two 8-forty three

II-Khoanh tròn đáp án đúng mà em chọn (4.0 pts)

1I ………….breakfast at 6.30 .

A. has B. have C.having D.to have
10-Minh ………….. to school at 6.40 .

A. going B. go C. goes D.to go
11-Do you …………. your face in the morning ?

A. wash B.washing C. to wash D. washes
12-He ……….. breakfast at six .

A. to have B.have C. has D.having
13-The toystore is between the restaurant ………the bakery .

A.but B. and C.to D.next
14-Lan has math and history ………Monday .

A. at B. on C.in D.to
15-There …………nine hundred students in the school .

A. are B . is C.am D.to be
16-She ……….her teeth every morning

A. to brush B.brush C. brushes D.brushing

III.Đọc đoạn văn sau, sau đó đánh (T) vào câu em cho là đúng; (F) vào câu em 
cho là sai( 2pts)

This is Minh. He is a student. He learns at ThaiThuy school in ThaiThuy
village .He gets up at six every morning. He leaves his house at six fourteen .The
school is near his house. His classes start at seven and end at eleven thirteen. He has
lunch at home at twelve o’clock .

17. He gets up at 6 o’clock every morning ……T………
18. He leaves his house at 7.00 ……F………
19. The school is not near his house ……F………
20. He has lunch at home at twelve o’clock T

III.Trả lời các câu hỏi sau về bản thân em (Hoc sinh tù tr¶ lêi) : ( 2 pts )

21. Which class are you in ?

</div>
(79)<div class='page_container' data-page=79>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

...
23.What do you do after school ?

...
24. How many people are there in your family?

...

Total Out

Teaching :6a………..

6b ...

6c ……… 
PERIOD 38 : CHỮA BÀI KIỂM TRA

I. Objectivies:

- Help pupils to give the best way when they do the test. As well as pupils known the
best answer.

II. Teaching methods:

- Work in group and individual.

III.Teaching aids:

-Teacher: lesson plan; answer key.
- Pupils : objects for learn.

IV. Stages

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

1. Warm up (5 )’

- Ask some questions
about the health and the
weather.

- Some of you don’t know
how to do the test well. So
today, we’re going to learn
this lesson.

2. Practice(35 )’

- Explain the structures to
pupils :

+ How to use the verb of
Tobe?

+ How to the “Verb”?

- Call some pupils to read
the passage about Minh.
- explain the content of the
passage.

- Call some pupils to
answer all the questions.

- Answer all the
questions.

- listen and write
down the lesson.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Read the passage.
- listen to the teacher.
- practice in pair :
P1: ask

P2 : answer.

PERIOD 38 :
CHỮA BÀI KIỂM TRA

I. Choose the best answer:

1- B
2- A
3- D
4- B
5- A
6- B
7- D
8- D

IIChoose : True / False

1- F

2- F

</div>
(80)<div class='page_container' data-page=80>

- Explain the question
words with : Wh/ H
question.

- Call pupils to practice in
pair.

- Explain how to describe
the house.

- Call some pupils to read
sentences before the class.

3. Consolidation (5 )’
- Repeat the content of the
lesson above again.

4. Homwork (2 )’
- Tell pupils to prepare
Unit 7 – A1,2

- Listen
Do the same.

- Read fore the class.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Write down.

3- T
4- T

III. Answer :

1- I’m in grade 6.
2- I get up at 6 o clock’

3- I play soccer after school.
4- There are four people in
my family.

IV. Descibe the house:

Ther are some tall trees
behind my house. Thre is a
big yard in front of my house.
Thre are flowers to the left of
my house and thre is a river to
the right of my house….

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Period 39(AI – A2): IS YOUR HOUSE BIG?

I. Aims:

 Listening a dialogue and reading a letter about a house to understand the

</div>
(81)<div class='page_container' data-page=81>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the details.

III. Teaching aids:

 Poster and cassette,...
IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

1-Warm up(5’)

 Predict Grid

- Set the scene: Ba is
talking about his daily
activities .

- Have students copy
the table.

- Get students to guess
about Ba’s daily

activities by writing the
time in figures.

- Let them listen to the
cassette.

- Listen to the teacher.
- Pay attention to the
teacher’s explanation.
- Students copy the
table.

- Guess about Ba’s
daily activities by
writing the time in
figures.

- Listen to the cassette.

2-New lesson(33’)

 Elicit vocabulary
 Translation
 Visual

 Realia

- Listen to the teacher.
-Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.

- Write the new words
in their notebooks.

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Period 39(AI – A2):

IS YOUR HOUSE BIG?

1-Vocabulary:

- a garden : khu vườn.
- a vegetable : rau.
- a photo : bức tranh

 Slap the board

- Put the Vietnamese
translation on the
board.

- Call two students of

two teams to the front
of the class.

- Call out one of
English words in loud
voice.

 Group works.

- Say the Vietnamese
translation .

- Run forward and slap
the correct words on
the board.

- Continue until
students have slapped
all the words.

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên81

Yes No

</div>
(82)<div class='page_container' data-page=82>

 True / Fasle

Prediction

- Set the scene: Hoa is
talking to Minh about

her house.

- Now, read the
statements and guess
they are true or fasle.
- Ask students to write
True/ Fasle in their
books.

- Put attention to the
teacher:

- Read the statements
on the board and guess
which statements are
true and which are
fasle.

-write T / F in their
books.

 A2 (page 72)

a) The house is in the country.

b) There’s a river near the
house.

c) There are strees to the left of
the

house.

d) There are two gardends.

- Ask students to read
the text and check their
prediction.

- Ask students to reread
the text by themselves.

 Matching

- Let some students
read the letter aloud.
-Ask students to match
the questions and
answers .

- Ask students to work
in teams.

- Ask them to copy the
letter and do the

exercise in the
notebooks.

- Read the text and

check their prediction.
- Reread the text by
themselves.

 Group work

- Some read aloud as
the teacher asks.

- Do the exercise, then
read aloud.

- Work in teams.
- Copy the letter and
write the questions and
answers in the

notebooks.

2. While reading:A2- page 72:

a) T c) F

b) F d) T

a) Is there a flower garden in
front …?

b) Is the house beautiful?

c) Is there a flower garden
behind …?

d) Is the lake to the right of the
house?

e) Is Nga in the city?

A) Yes, it is.

B) No, it isn’t.

C) No, she isn’t.

D) Yes, there is.

E) No, there isn’t.

 Transformation

Writing

Ask students to
change the underlined
information to descride
their own house and
then draw a picture of it
as a photo from the

main text of the letter.

-Students change the
underlined information
to descride their own
house and then draw a
picture of it as a photo
from the main text of
the letter.

3.Post reading:

 My House

There is a flower garden in
front of the house. There’s a
vegetable garden behind the
house. To the left of the house,
there’s a lake. To right of the
house, there are tall trees. Here
is a photo.

3. Consolidation(5’)

- Repeat the content of
the lesson above again.

- Take notes and

memorize

</div>
(83)<div class='page_container' data-page=83>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

4. Homework(2’):

- Ask students to learn
by heart town

vocabulary.

- Have them prepare
Unit7-Lesson 2:(A3-5):
Facilities vocabulary
with “Is/are there …”

suggests.
- Write down.

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Period 40(A3 – A5): IS YOUR HOUSE BIG?

I. Aims:

 Help students know facilities vocabulary with “Is there a… / are there any…?”

and short answer.

</div>
(84)<div class='page_container' data-page=84>

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use facilities vocabulary with

“Is there a.... / are there any....?” and short answer to describe the town.

III. Teaching aids

 Pictures and poster,...
IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

1- Warm up(5’)

 Listen and Draw

- Ask students to pick
out a piece of paper.
- Ask them to listen to
the teacher and draw.

- Students to pick out
a piece of paper.
- Listen to the teacher
and draw.

- Make their own
pictures and dictate
them to a partner.

“ There’s a house. Behind the
house there are mountains. To
the left of the house there’s a
tree. In front of the house there’s
a river. To the right of the house
a man is driving a bike.”

2-New lesson(30’)

 Elicit vocabulary

Translation
Visual
Situation
Visual
Situation

- Listen to the teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.

- Write the new words
in their notebooks.

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Period 40(A3 – A5):
IS YOUR HOUSE BIG?

1-Vocabulary:

- a bank : ngân hàng .
- a clinic : phòng khám.
- a post offic: bưu điện.
- a suppermarket : siêu thị.
- Shops : cửa hàng

 What and where

- Elicit the vocabulary
from the students and
write them in the
circles.

- Get students to repeat
the words including the

rubbed out words by
pointing at the empty
circle.

- Students repeat
chorally and
remember all the
words.

- Go to the board and
fill in the circles with
the right words.

 Rub out & 2-Target language:

a bank
a
clinic
Shops

suppermarket
a post

</div>
(85)<div class='page_container' data-page=85>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

remember dialogue

- Set the scene: Nga is
asking Phong about
- Put the dialogue on
the board .

- Rub out some of the
words .

- Get students to isolate
the model sentence.
- Ask students some
questions

+ Is there a hotel near
Nga’s house?

+ Are there any trees
near her house?

- Practice saying the
dialogue.

- Remember te rubbed
out words and keep
practicing it.

- Repeat the rubbed
out dialogue from
memory.

- Isolate the model
sentence.

- Answer the
questions

+ Yes, there is.
+ No, there aren’t.
- Copy the notes and
memorize.

Nam: What is this ?

Nga: It is a hotel.

Nam: What are those?

Nga: They are trees.

Nam: Is there a hotel near your
house?

Nga: Yes, there is.

Nam: Are there any trees near
your house?

Nga: No, there aren’t.

- Is there a ……… ?

- Yes, there is / No, there isn’t.
 - Are there any ………?
 - Yes, there are / No, there 
aren’t.

- Dùng để hỏi đốn xem
có cái gì đó ở nơi nào đó
hay khơng

 Picture drill

- Run through the
pictures.

- Hold up the first
picture and say the
model sentences:

+Is there a hotel near 
your

house?

+ Yes, there is / No, 
there isn’t.

- Do the same for the
seccond picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat it chorally
and then individually.
- Make the sentences
for themselves.

- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs practice
in front.

3. Practice: A3, page 74

a) hotel
b) flowers
c) bank
d) supermarket
e) restuarant
f) hospital
g) post office

h) police station

 Guessing game.

- Show them the
pictures. Ask them to

choose one of the
houses.

- Get the rest of the
class to guess which
house they choose. The
first student guesses the
house correctly comes
up to the front, chooses
a new house and the
game continues.

- Ask them to listen to

- Students look at the
pictures and choose
one of the houses the
teacher shows .

- The rest of the class
asks him or her

question to find which
house he or she

chooses.

* Are there any trees?
/ Are they behind the 
house? / Is it house b?

* Yes, it is.

- Listen to the

4. Further practice:

A4, page 74
- House a)

- House b)

- House c)

A5, page 75:(House a)
 There are some mountains

</div>
(86)<div class='page_container' data-page=86>

the cassette and try to
find out which house it
is.

cassette and try to find
out which house it is.

behind the house. There are 
some trees to the right. There’s a
lake to the left.

3. Consolidation(5’)

- Repeat the content of
the lesson above again.

4. Homework(5’):

- Ask students to learn
by heart facilities
vocabulary with “Is
there a… / are there
any…?” and short
answer. .

- Have them do the
exercises in the

workbook from page 64
to 65 and prepare Unit
7 - Lesson 3:(B):

Reading a text about
Ba’s and Chi’s house.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do homework as
the teacher suggests.
- write down.

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Period 41 (B1- B4) : TOWN OR COUNTRY?

I. Aims:

 Reading a text about Ba’s and Chi’s house to understand the differences

between town and country.

</div>
(87)<div class='page_container' data-page=87>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010
 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the differences

between town and country.

III. Teaching aids:

 Textbooks, chalk,...
IV. Procedure

</div>
(88)<div class='page_container' data-page=88>

Giáo án tiếng Anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên
Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

1-Warm up(5’)

 Hangman

- Draw strokes on the
board. Each stroke stands
for a letter of the word.
- The teacher draws a
stroke if a student’s
guess is not right.

- The teacher gives the
answer if they lose.

2- New lesson(30’)

 Elicit vocabulary
 Translation
 Antonym
 Translation
 Situation
 Visual
 Synonym

- Students take
turn to guess the

letters of the
words.

- Give a letter in
the alphabet.
- Have to try to
guess the word.
- Find out the
word.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.
- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

_ _ __ __ (stores)
_ _ _ _ (bank)
_ _ _ _ _ (flowers)
_ _ _ __ (supermarket)

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Period 41 (B1- B4) : TOWN

OR COUNTRY?

1-Vocabulary:

- noisy : ồn ào.
- quiet : yên lặng.
- an aparment : căn hộ.
- a market : chợ.

- a zoo : vườn thú

- paddy field = rice paddy: cánh
đồng lúa.

 Rub out and

remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat
chorally and
remember all the
English words.
- Call the English

words and write
the English words
if there is time.

 Checking vocabulary:

 Kim’s game

- Have students look at
the pictures of Ba’s and
Chi’s house (Page 76,
77) in 20 seconds and try
to remember as many
facilities as possible.
- Divide class into two
groups.

- Put away the pictures
and ask students to go to
the board and write the
facilities they’ve seen
from memory.

- The group having the
most right English words
is the winner.

- Look at the
pictures of Ba’s

and Chi’s house
(Page 76, 77) in
20 seconds and
try to remember
as many facilities
as possible.

- Work in groups.
- Put away the
pictures and ask
students to go to
the board and
write the facilities
they’ve seen from
memory.

- Congratulate.

 B1 (page 76, 77)
 Ba’s house

My name’s Ba. I live in an
apartment in town. Near the
apartment there is a supermarket, a
post office, a bank, a clinic, a
market and a zoo. It’s very noisy
here.

Chi’s house

My name’s Chi. I live in a house
in the counrty. There aren’t any
stores here. There are trees and
flowers, a river, a lake and paddy
fields. It’s very quiet. Here is a
picture.

2-While reading: B1( p76,77)

*Ba’s house: a supermarket, a 
post office, a bank, a clinic, a 
market and a zoo.

- Ask students to read the
text and check their

- Read the text
and check their

</div>
(89)<div class='page_container' data-page=89>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Period 42( C1-3) : On the move

I. Aims:

 Simple present “How” question and “by car / bike train …” to talk about

transportation.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students can talk about means of transport.

III. Teaching aids:

 Pictures and posters, textbooks, chalk, board,....

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board
1. Chuck up (5’)

- Write the new words and
make the question with “
How…….?”

2. Warm up(5’)
 Guessing game.

- Show them the pictures.
Ask them to choose one
of the houses.

- Get the rest of the class
to guess which house they
choose. The first student
guesses the house

correctly comes up to the
front, chooses a new
house and the game
continues.

- Come to the
board to answer.

- Students look at
the pictures and
choose one of the
houses the teacher
shows .

- The rest of the
class asks him or
her question to
find which house
he or she chooses.
* Are you going to
the bank?

I’m going to
……….
………
- factory

- museum
- post office

- stadium

</div>
(90)<div class='page_container' data-page=90>

* No, I’m not.
* Yes, I am.

3. Practice(25’)

 Elicit vocabulary

- Use pictures on
page 78 – 79.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.
- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Period 42( C1-3) :

On the move

1-Vocabulary:

- by bike : bằng xe đạp.
- walk : đi bộ.

- by motorbike : bằng xe máy.
- by bus : b»ng xe buýt.
- by car : bằng xe ô tô.
- by train : bằng tàu hỏa.
- by plane : bằng máy bay.

 What and where

- Elicit the vocabulary
from the students and
write them in the circles.
- Get students to repeat
the words including the

rubbed out words by
pointing at the empty
circle.

- Students repeat
chorally and
remember all the
words.

- Go to the board
and fill in the
circles with the
right words.

 Dialogue build.

- Set the scene.

- Read the dialogue and
write few key words on
the board to help students
remember what the two
speaker in the dialogue
say to each other .

- Get students to write in
the missing words on the
board.

- Get students to isolate

the model sentence.

-Answer the
teacher’s question.
- Look at the board
and listen to the
teacher carefully.
- Reproduce the
dialogue from the
cues.

- Build the

dialogue until it is
memorized.

- Write in the
missing words on
the board.

2-Target language: A5(page 54)

Ba: What time do you usually go to
school?

Lan: At 6.30 .

Ba: How do you go to school ?
Ba: I go to school by bike .

Ba: How does Nga travel to
school?

Lan: She travels by motorbike.

 Form

*How do you + V (go / travel)…?
- I + V (go / travel) + by + phương
tiện.

*How does he/she + V (go / travel)
…?

-He/she + (goes / travels) +by + p.t

 Substitution drill

- Get students to repeat
the question.

- Call out phrases to be
changed in the question:

- Listen to the
teacher and repeat
after the teacher.
- Make the change

3.Practice:

C2 on page 78 – 79 (11 picture
cues)

</div>
(91)<div class='page_container' data-page=91>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

+How does Lien go to
school?

- She goes to schoolby
bike

- Do the same for the
seccond picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

and repeat the new
question.

+How does Lien
go to school?
- She goes to
schoolby bike
- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs
practice in front.

- Thu / motorbike -Mr Ba/
motorbike

- Tuan / bus - Miss Hoa /
walk

- Hoa / car - Mr Kim /
train

- Huong / walk - Mrs Dung /
car

- Mr Hai / train

 Nought and crosses

- Put the grid on the
board.

- Divide class into teams.
One is noughts (O) and
the other is Crosses (X).
- Two teams choose any
things in the boxes and
ask questions about what
things are .

- The team which has
three noughts or three
crosses on a line will win
the game.

4. Consolidation(5’)

- Repeat the content of the
lesson above again.

- Vocabulary (means of
transport).

- How do you + V (go /
travel)…?

- I + V (go / travel) +
phương tiện .

- How does he/she + V
(go / travel)…?

- He/she +Vs/es(goes

5. Homework(5’):

- Ask students to learn by
heart means of transport
with “How” question to
talk about transportation.
- Have them prepare
Unit 7 :(C4-6): Reading a
text about Hoang’s daily
routine.

- Look at the
board.

- Work in groups.
- One is noughts
(O) and the other
is Crosses (X).
- Choose any
phrases in the
boxes, ask and ask
questions about
where they live :
+How does Lien
go to school?
+ She goes by bike
- Congratulate the
winner.

4.Further practice:

Mrs Dung Mrs Lan Mr Hai

Lien Thu Tuan

Mr Ba Mr Kim Miss Hoa

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do homework as

the teacher

suggests.

- Write down.

</div>
(92)<div class='page_container' data-page=92>

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Period 43: on the move ( C4-6)

I. Aims:

 Reading a text about Hoang’s routine for further pracitce in simple present

habitual actions.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the text about

Hoang’s routine.

III. Teaching aids:

</div>
(93)<div class='page_container' data-page=93>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content

1. Warm up (5’)
 Find someone

who

- Put the table on the
board.

- Get students to get
into groups.

- Get students to ask
each other questions.
+ T: Do you get up at
5.30?

+ S(Lan): Yes, I do.

- Correct if there are
any mistakes.

- Feedback.

 - Work in

groups.

- Stand up and ask
each orther
questions. When
they find someone
who says “Yes”
they fill in the
name. They can’t
fill in someone’s
name more than
once.

Find someone who Name

……gets up at 5.30 Lan

……gets up at 6
……walks to school
……goes to school by
bus

……goes to school by
bike

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE

Period 43:on the move ( C4-6)

2. Practice(30’)

 Open prediction

- Set the scene: Hoang
is talking about his
routine.

- Show students the
table and ask :+What
time does he get up?
- Ask students to
predict what time
Hoang does the
following things by
answering the
questions.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Read the table
and answer the
teacher’s

questions:

+ He gets up at 6.
-Predict what time

Hoang does the
following things
by answering the
questions.

1 .Pre - reading:

Action What time

He gets up 6.00

He leaves the
house

School starts
School ends
He has lunch

- Ask students to read
the text and check their
predictions.

- Ask students to reread
the text by themselves.

 Lucky numbers

- Let some students
read the question
aloud.

-Ask students to
choose any numbers
and answer the
questions .

- Ask students to work
in teams.

- Ask them to write the
questions and answers
in the notebooks.

- Read the text
and check their
predictions.

- Reread the text
by themselves.

 Group work

- Some read aloud
as the teacher asks.
- choose any
numbers and

answer the

questions .

- Work in teams.
- Write the
questions and
answers in the
notebooks.

2. While reading: C4, page 80:

5.30 11.30
 6.30 12.00

7.00

Reading comprehension
1 2 3 
4 5 6 7 
8

1e) What time does classes start?

2c) Does he goes to school by car?

3 Lucky number.

4f) What time do they end?

5 Lucky number.

6b) What time does he go to

school?

7a) What time does Hoang get up?

 Survey

- Get students to fill in
their real

- Fill in their real
names and what
time they do the

3.Post reading:

Action Name…What time?Name…

</div>
(94)<div class='page_container' data-page=94>

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT

Period 44: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? (A1- A3)

I. Aims:

 Present progreesive positive staments with I / she / he to talk about actions

happening now.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students can express what is happening at the

moment.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cassette and pictures

III. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

1. Warm up (5’)

- Bingo

- Put the words on the
board.

-Ask students to
choose any four words
and copy them into
their books.

- Let students listen to
the cassette.

-Look at the board.
- Listen to the
teacher.

- Choose any four
words.

- Put ticks next to
the words that they
listen to.

- Shouts “Bingo”.

Plane
bike
walk
train
car

motorbike

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT

Period 44: (A1- A3)

2. Practice(30’)

Elicit vocabulary

 Visual
 Situation
 Mime
 Situation

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.

- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- to play video games : chơi trò chơi
điện tử.

- to ride a bike : đi xe đạp.
- to drive :lái xe (ô tô).

</div>
(95)<div class='page_container' data-page=95>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010
 Rub out and

remember

-Point to the
Vietnamese

translations and rub
out English words.
- Get students to call
the English words.

Presentation text.

- Set the scene: They
are talking about
What they are doing.
- Ask students to
listen to the text about
the town.

- Isolate the model

sentences by

answering the
questions and:

+What does he do?

+ Did he play video
games?

+ Is he playing video
games?

- Ask them to write
the form in their
notebooks.

- Students repeat
chorally and
remember all the
English words.
- Call the English
words and write the
English words if
there is time.

- Listen to the
teacher’s

explanation.

- Read the
statements.

- Answer the
questions.

- Understand of the
target language in

term of meaning,
use and form by
answering the
questions: + He
plays video games.
+ No.

+ Yes.

- Write the form in
their notebooks.

2- Target language:

-A1 – Top three pictures (page 82)
 + I am playing video games.

+ He is playing video games.
 + I am riding a bike.

+ She is riding a bike.
 + I am driving a car.
 + He is driving a car.

I am + V“ing”.

He / she is + V“ing”.

- diễn tả một hoạt động đang diễn
ra.

* Notes: - Ride – riding

- Drive - driving

 Picture drill

- Run through the
pictures.

- Hold up the first
picture and say the
model sentences:

+I’m walking to
school

+ She’s waiting for a
bus

- Do the same for the
seccond picture.

- Correct their
mistakes.

- Look at the
pictures.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat it chorally

and then

individually.

- Make the sentence
for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs
practice in front.

</div>
(96)<div class='page_container' data-page=96>

 Nought and

crosses

- Put the grid on the
board.

- Divide class into
teams. One is noughts
(O) and the other is
Crosses (X).

- Two teams choose
any things in the boxes
and ask questions
about what things are .
- The team which has
three noughts or three
crosses on a line will
win the game.

- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.
- One is noughts (O)
and the other is
Crosses (X).

- Choose any
phrases in the
boxes, ask and ask
questions about
where they live :

+I’m walking to
school.

+ I’m driving a bus.

- Congratulate the
winner.

4.Further practice:

walk to
school

drive a
bus

travel by
bus
wait for a

train

ride a
bike

play a
game
go by plane drive acar

ride a
motorbik

e

3. consolidation(5’)

- Repeat the content
of the leson:

+ I am + V“ing”.
 + He / she “ing”.

- Vocabulary.

4Homework(5’):

- Ask students to learn
by heart vocabulary
and How to talk about
actions happening
now.

- Have them prepare
Unit 8: Lesson2 (A1
conti..) Present
progressive with “
We / they”.

- Listen to the
teacher

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do homework as

the teacher

</div>
(97)<div class='page_container' data-page=97>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT

Period 45: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? (A2-A6)

I. Aims:

 Present progressive “Wh” Questions with she / he / they to talk about actions

happening now

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use Present progreesive“Wh”

uestions With she/ he / they.

III. Teaching aids:

 Pictures, chalk, board,...
IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

1. Warm up (5’)
 Slap the board

- Stick the pictures on the
board.

- Call two students of two
teams to the front of the
class.

- Call out whole sentences:
“ He is walking to
school”

Group works.

- Pay attention to
the pictures .

- Listen to the
teacher and their
classmates.

- Run forward and
slap the correct
words on the board.

UNIT 8:OUT AND

ABOUT

Period 45: (A2-A6)

WHAT ARE YOU

DOING?

2. Practice(30’)

 Presentation picture.

- Set the scene: We are
talking about your
classmates.

- Get them to guess what are

- Listen to the
teacher

- Students guess
what they are
doing.

- Look at the

1- Presentation:
 + What is he doing?

+ He is riding a bike.
 + What is she doing?.
 + She is driving a car . 
 + What are they doing?.

+ They are playing video

</div>
(98)<div class='page_container' data-page=98>

they doing.

- Point to the pictures and
ask them to tell what they
are doing:

*Student1:He is riding a
bike.

* Teacher:What is he doing?
*Student2:She is driving a
car.

*Teacher:What is she
doing?

- Get students isolate the
model senteces.

- Ask them to write the

form in their notebooks.

pictures and tell

what their

classmates are
doing.

*Student1: He is
riding a bike.

- Repeat after the
teacher’s question.
- Students isolate
the model senteces.
- Memorize and
write the form in
their notebooks.

games.

+ What are you doing?
 + I am studying English.

- What is he / she doing?

- He / She is + V“ ing” . 
- What are you / they doing? 
- I am / They are + V“ ing” .

-………đang làm gì?

- diễn tả một hoạt động đang
diễn ra.

 Picture drill

- Run through the pictures.
- Hold up the first picture
and say the model sentences:

+What are you doing? 
 + I am learning English.

- Do the same for the
seccond picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

 Answers given

- Have students read all the
three parts a, b, and c.

- Ask them to make
questions with question
words: Who, What, Where
and How as in the examples.
-Correct if there are any
mistakes.

3. consolidation(5’)

- What is he / she doing?

- He / She is + V“ ing” . 
- What are you / they doing?
- I am / They are + V“ ing”

4.Homework(5’):

- Ask students to learn by

- Look at the
pictures.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat it chorally

and then

individually.

- Make the sentence
for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs
practice in front

( A4 P. 84 a – f )

2- Practice: A3-4, page 83, 84

- A3, page 83:

a) learn English c) drive
a car

b) ride a bike d) wait
for a bus

- A4, page 84:

a) ride a bike d) ride a
motorbike

b) drive a car e) wait for
a bus

c) walk to school f) wait for
a train.

- Read all the three
parts a, b, and c.
- Make questions
with question
words: Who, What,

Where and How as
in the examples.
- Ask questions.
- Work in pairs.

3- Further practice:

 A6, page 85:

a) Mr. Ha is a businessman. He
is going to Ha Noi.

b) Miss Hoa is a teacher. She is
going to schol.

c) Mr. Tuan and Mrs. Vui are
doctors. They are going to the
hospital.

</div>
(99)<div class='page_container' data-page=99>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

heart Present progressive
“WH” question with He
/she / they.

- Have them do some
exercies in the workbook
and prepare Unit 8- (B):

- Take notes and

memorize

- Do homework as
requested.

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT

Period: 46: A TRUCK DRIVER (B1 – B4)

I. Aims:

 Help students understand the main ideas and details by reading a story picture

about a struck driver.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the main ideas and

details.

III. Teaching aids:

 Posters, pictures, chalk, board,...
IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

1. Warm up (5’)
 Nought and

crosses

- Put the grid on the
board.

- Divide class into
teams. One is noughts
(O) and the other is
Crosses (X).

- Two teams choose
any things in the boxes
and ask questions about
what things are .
- The team which has
three noughts or three
crosses on a line will

- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.
- One is noughts (O)

and the other is
Crosses (X).

- Choose any phrases
in the boxes, ask and
ask questions about
where they live :

+ Where do you live?
+ I live in / on /
near / next to…

- Congratulate the
winner.

He / drive
a car

They/
wait for

a bus

Lan /
ride a
bike
 Hoa /

walk to
school

I / learn
English

She /
wait for

a train
They /

ride a
motorbike

Nam/ go
to Ha

Noi

Ba/
travel by

bike

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT
Period: 46:

A TRUCK DRIVER (B1 – B4)

</div>
(100)<div class='page_container' data-page=100>

win the game.

2. Practice(35’)
 Present vocabs:

-Picture
-Picture
-Picture
-Picture
-Picture

 Matching

- Put the Vietnamese
translation and English
words on the board.
-Ask students to match
English words with the
Vietnamese

translation .

- Ask students to work
in teams.

 Group works.

- Lookl at the board.
- Listen to the
teacher.

- Work in teams.

- Come to the board
and match English
words with the
Vietnamese

translation.

1-Vocabulary:

a truck driver .

a farmer .

(to) load (v) .

(to) unload (v) .

a food stall
(to) arrive at (v) .

 Ordering

statements
prediction

- Give the posters of
statements on the
board.

- Get students to work

in pairs to put the
statements in correct
order by numbering the
statements from 1 to 6.

- Read the statements
on the board.

- Work in pairs.

- Put the statemants
in correct order
numbering the them
from 1 to 6.

Actions thin
k

rea
d

going to Ha Noi 4

meeting the
farmer

2

having breakfast 6

going to a farm 1

loading vegtables
in..

3

unloading the
truck

5

- Ask students to read
the text about Mr
Quang and check their
predictions.

 Comprehension

Questions

- Get students to work
in pairs to answer the
questions on page 87.
- Give feedback and
ask students to write
the answers on the
board.

- Have students

practice asking and

- Read the text about
Mr Quang and check
their predictions.
- Students to work in
pairs to answer the
questions on page 87.
- Students write the
answers on the board.
- Practice asking
answering the
questions in open
pairs and then close
pairs.

2- While reading:

B1, page 86:

4 - 2 - 6 - 1 - 3 - 5

 Comprehension questions
a) What does Mr. Quang do?

b) Where is he going at five in
the morning?

c) Who is waiting for him?

d) Where is he taking the
vegetables?

e) What is he doing at seven
o’clock?

</div>
(101)<div class='page_container' data-page=101>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

answering the
questions in open pairs
and then close pairs.

 Role play

- Ask students to work
in pairs to practice
asking and answering .
One student plays the
role of Lan and
anotherplay the role of
Ba.

- Call some pairs
demonstrate before the
class.

- Give feedback and
correct ( their
pronunciation /
intonation).

- Ask them to work in
pairs to practice the
dialogue.

- Students to work in
pairs to practice
asking and answering
. One student plays
the role of Lan and
anotherplay the role
of Ba.

- some pairs
demonstrate before
the class.

- Put attention to the
teacher.

- Students practice
the dialogue in pairs.

3-Post reading: B2, page 87
- Lan: What are you doing?

- Ba: I’m doing my homework.

- Lan: Are you doing math?

- Ba: Yes, I am.

- Lan: Are you copying Nam’s
work?

- Ba: No, I am not. I’m correcting
it.

- Lan: Is Tuan working?

- Ba: No, he isn’t.

- Lan: Is he playing soccer?

- Ba: Yes, he is.

- ……… ……… ………
……… ……… ………

3. Consolidation(3’)

- Ask students to learn
by heart vocabulary
and write about
Mr.Quang’s daily life.

4.Homework(2’):

- Have them prepare
Unit 8 - Lesson 5:(

C1-2): Can / Can’t and
traffic vocabulary.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the teacher
suggests.

- Write down.

</div>
(102)<div class='page_container' data-page=102>

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c

………

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT

Period: 47: ROAD SIGNS (C1 – C2)

I. Aims:

 Help students know the usage of “can / can’t” statements and traffic

vocabulary.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “can / can’t” statements.

III. Teaching aids:

 Poster and pictuers

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

1. Check up (15’)
- Describe your house?

2. Warm up (3’)

 Mapped dialogue

- Put the dialogue on the
board which is only
words. The words are
cues.

- Model the dialogue.
- Run through the cues
like a drill with the
whole class.

- Write on paper.

- Look at the board
and listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Practice the
dialogue in pair .
- Some pairs practice
in front.

- Rewrite the
dialogue .

Lan  Ba 

-What/you/do ?
-you/do/math ?
-you/copy/Na.?
What/Tuan/do?
-Nga &

Huong/
work?

do/homework
.

Yes
No

</div>
(103)<div class='page_container' data-page=103>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010
3. Practice (22’)

 Elicit vocabulary
 Visual
 Translation
 Visual
 Situation
 Translation
 Antonym
 Mime

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.

- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- a policeman : coâng an, cảnh
sát.

- difficul : khó khăn
- a sign : biển báo

- one-way : đường một chiều
- to park : đỗ xe.

- turn letf / right :rẽ trái/rẽ phải.
- go straight : đi thẳng

 Rub out and

remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat
chorally and
remember all the
English words.

- Call the English

words and write the
English words if
there is time.

 Presentation text.

- Set the scene: You are
going to read a text about
Hoan.

- Ask students to read
the text and answer the
questions.

- Isolate the model
sentences by pointing to
the signs:

-“You can park
here”

-“You can’t park
here”

- Ask them to write the
form in their notebooks.

- Listen to the

teacher’s

explanation.

- Read the
statements.

- Answer the
questions.

- Understand of the
target language in
term of meaning, use
and form by
pointing to the
signs.

- Write the form in
their notebooks.

2 -C1 – Road signs (page 89)

 Comprehension Questions

+ What does Hoan do?

+ Is his job difficul?

+ What does this sign mean?
 + What does this sign mean?

- You can park here.

- You can’t park here

You can / can’t + động từ
nguyên

Maãu ( Vinf )

- Diễn tả khả năng làm
được hay

khơng làm được việc . gì

 Picture drill

- Run through the
pictures.

- Hold up the first picture
and say the model
sentences:

+Can you turn left ? 
 + No.

- Look at the
pictures.

- Listen to the

teacher.

- Repeat it chorally

and then

individually.

3. Practice: A3, page 74

a) turn left

b) turn right

</div>
(104)<div class='page_container' data-page=104>

You can’t turn left.

- Do the same for the
seccond picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Make the sentence
for themselves.

- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs practice
in front.

c) park here

d) ride a motorbike
e) park here

 Write it up

- Let students look at the
signs and complete the
sentences with “can” or

“can’t” and write in the
notebook.

- Do the model.

- Look at the signs.
- Listen to the
teacher.

- Complete the
sentences with “can”

or “can’t” and write
in the notebook.

4.Further practice:

 C2, page 89,90:

a) You ……… turn left.

b) You ……… turn
right.

c) You ……… go
ahead.

d) You ……… ride a
motorbike.

4. Consolidation (3’)

- Ask students to learn
by heart traffic
vocabulary and can /
can’t statements.

5. Homework(2’)

- Have them prepare
Unit 8 - Lesson 6:(C3 –
C4): Must / musn’t
statements.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the teacher
suggests.

</div>
(105)<div class='page_container' data-page=105>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT

Period 48 : ROAD SIGNS (c3 – c6)

I. Aims:

 Reading a text about road signs to understand “must” and “ musn’t” for

obligation or prohibition.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “Must / musn’t” for

obligation or prohibition.

III. Teaching aids:

 Poster and cassette.

III. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

1.Warm up (8’)
 Word Square

- Write the word of the
square on the board.
- Tell the students
what the topic is and
how many hidden
words are there.
- Get the students to
come to the board and
circle any words they
can see.

- Get them to put the
word into a present
progressive statement
and write it on the
board.

- Look at the word
of the square on the
board.

- Listen to the
teacher and answer
the teacher questions.

+ There are 19
hidden workds

- Come to the board
and circle any words
they can see.

- Put the word into a
present progressive
statement and write it
on the board.

R O A D S I G N D

W K O R X H I S A

A C C I D E N T N

R U C D R L O R G

N R A E I P T A E

S T R A V E L I R

T U S L E F T G O

O R I G H T O H U

P N G O F A S T S

: road sign , travel, left, right……
: stop, turn, car, ride, go, drive,
stra..

: truck

UNIT 8:OUT AND ABOUT

Period 48 :Lesson 5:

ROAD SIGNS (c3 – c6)

2.Practice (30’)
Elicit vocabulary

1-Vocabulary:

- dangerous (adj) : nguy hieåm.

</div>
(106)<div class='page_container' data-page=106>

Giáo án tiếng Anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Situation
Example
Visual
Situation
Antonym
Translation
Situation

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.
- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

- an accident : tai naïn.
- an intersection : giao loä.

- to slow down : giảm tốc độ.
- to go fast : đi nhanh, tăng tốc.
- to warn us : cảnh báo chúng
ta.

- to help us : giuùp chuùng ta.

 Slap the board

- Put the Vietnamese
translation on the
board.

- Call two students of
two teams to the front
of the class.

- Call out one of
English words in loud
voice.

Group works.
- Say the
Vietnamese
translation .

- Run forward and
slap the correct
words on the board.
- Continue until
students have
slapped all the
words.

Pre – questions

- Give students two
questions and ask them
to discuss with their
partners to predict the
answers.

- Read the two

questions and discuss
with their partners to
predict the answers.

1) What must we do when there is a
intersection ahead?

2) What musn’t we do when the
sign says “Stop”?

- Ask students to read
the text on page 90 and
check their predictions.
-Mention the verb
“must” and “musn’t”.
- Get students to work
in pairs to answer the
questions about the
signs :+What must we
do ?

+ What musn’t we do?

- Read the text and
check their

predictions.
- Take notes and
memorize

- Try to ask more
questions about road
signs to make sure

that everybody in
class understand
what to do when
seeing the road signs

2-While reading:

1) We must slow down.

2) We musn’t go straight ahead.
Form:

Must / musn’t + động từ
nguyên

maãu ( Vinf )

- Phải / không
được………

- Nói lời bắt buộc hay
nghiêm cấm

điều gì.

 Ordering

pictures

- Ask students to look

at the pictures in C4 on
page 91.

- Look at the road
signs on page 91.
- Students listen to
the cassette and put
the pictures in correct

3-Post reading: C4 , page 91

Road
signs

No. Road signs No.

a)Slow 4 e)X 8

giúp chúng ta

đi nhanh giao

lộ.

giúp chúng ta nạn.tai
giao lộ

</div>
(107)<div class='page_container' data-page=107>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

- Let students listen to

the cassette and put the
pictuers in correct
order by numbering
them.

order by numbering

them. do.b)Turn park…

lef.

6 f)X.motbik 7
c)X turn

ri.

1 g)enter.ro. 5
d) Stop 2 h) P…car. 3

3.Consolidation(5’)

- Ask students to learn
by heart vocabulary
and “Can (not) / must
(not)” .

4-Homework(2’)

- Have them do some
exercies in the

workbook from page
73 to 74 and prepare
Unit 8:

GRAMMAR
PRACTICE

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do homework as
the teacher

requested.
- Write down.

</div>
(108)<div class='page_container' data-page=108>

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT
Period 49: GRAMMAR PRACTICE
I. Aims:

 Further practice in the grammar points: simple present, present progressive,

prepositions and question words.

II. Objective

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use grammar points fluently.

III. Teaching aids:
 Textbook, ...
IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board
1-Warm up(5’)

 Bingo

- Put the table on the
board.

-Ask students to choose
any five words and copy

them into their books.
- Let students listen to the
teacher.

-Look at the board.
- Listen to the
teacher.

- Choose any five
words.

- Put ticks next to
the words that they
listen to.

- Shouts “Bingo”.

Wait, turn left, load, walk,
travel, train, car, turn right, get, go
straight, must, warn, intersection,
stop, bike

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT
Period 49: GRAMMAR

PRACTICE

2-New lesson(33’)

 Chain game

- Write the phrases on the
board.

- Ask students to get into
groups of four or five.
- Do the model.

 Lucky numbers

- Write the numbers on
the board.

- Divide class into teams.
The teams take turn to
choose the numbers.
- Tell students that they
have to answer the

- Look at the board
- Get into groups of
four or five.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Play games.

- Look at the board.
- Work in teams.

- Take turn to
choose the
numbers.
- Answer the
questions by

1-Present progressive with I, he, 
she:

-S1: I’m watching TV.

- S2: She’s watching TV and I’m
playing video games

*Present progressive with all
person:

1 2 3 4 5 6
7

1. c) is / watching 6. Lucky
number

2. a) is / riding 7. e) is
/listening

</div>
(109)<div class='page_container' data-page=109>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

questions . looking at the
picture.

number

4. d) are / playing 9. g) is /
going

5. b) are / witing

 Matching

- Let some students read
the item aloud.

-Ask students to match the
item in column A with the
item in column B .

- Ask students to work in
teams.

- Ask them to do the
exercise 3 in the
notebooks.

Group work

- Some read aloud
as the teacher asks.
- Do the exercise,
then read aloud.

- Work in teams.
- Do the exercise 3
in the notebooks.

2-Preposition of place (3) :

A B
1.A girl is ... a. to the left
of

2.A boy is waiting b. in
3…… mountains …c. to the
right of

4.some house……… d. in front
of

5…… some trees… e. opposite
6……… atruck…… f. behind
Answers :

1/b; 2/d; 3/f; 4e; 5c; 6/a

 Gap fill

Get students to fill in the
blank with the correct
form of the verbs in
brackets : Present simple
or Present progressive.

Fill in the blank
with the correct
form of the verbs in
brackets : Present
simple or Present
progressive.

*Present simple and Present
progressive (5) :

a.play/are playing.d.walk/am
walking

b.rides/is riding. e.drives/is
driving.

c.go/are going.

 Answer given

- Show students the
statements.

- Let students ask
questions.

- Ask them to work in
pairs

-Correct if there are any
mistakes

- Look at the board.
- Read the

statements.
- Ask questions.
- Work in pairs.

3-Question words (4) :

a. She is going to the store.
b. Nga is waiting for Lan.
c. She is carrying a bag.
d. It is twelve o’clock.

 Nought and crosses

- Put the grid on the
board.

- Divide class into teams.
One is noughts (O) and
the other is Crosses (X).
- Two teams choose any
things in the boxes and
ask questions about what
things are .

- The team which has
three noughts or three

- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.
- One is noughts
(O) and the other is
Crosses (X).

- Choose any
phrases in the
boxes, ask and ask
questions about
where they live :
+ What does Sign

4- Must and mustn’t – Can and 
can’t :

STOP b c

h i

20 Km
d

g
P

f e

</div>
(110)<div class='page_container' data-page=110>

crosses on a line will win
the game.

“i” mean?

+ You must slow
down

- Congratulate the
winner.

3.Consolidation (5’) 
- Repeat all the structures
abve again.

4.Homework(2’)

- Ask students to review
vocabulary and Grammar
points (Unit1 – Unit8) and
exercises in the exercise
book from Unit 1 to Unit
8 .

- Have them prepare
REVISION.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Review

vocabulary and
Grammar points
(Unit1 – Unit8) and
exercises in the
exercise book from
Unit 1 to Unit 8 .
- Prepare

REVISION.

</div>
(111)<div class='page_container' data-page=111>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

Period: 50

«n tËp häc kú i

: a - theory

I. Aims:

 Further practice in the grammar points: simple present, present progressive,

prepositions and question words.

II. Objective

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use grammar points fluently.

III. Teaching aids:

 Textbook, ...

IV. Procedure:

The Simple present tense
 1-Formular (Công thức)

a. Ordinary verbs (động từ thường)

* Affirmative (thể xác định)

(I, you, we, they )+ V(inf)...
(He , she, it) + V(s/es)...

-Thêm “ES” khi động từ tận cùng là “O” (go → goes), “SS” (miss→ misses),
“CH” (watch→ watches), “X” (fix→fixes).

- Động từ tận cùng là “Y” ( trước Y là một phụ âm):
Y→ I + ES

Ex: Study→ studies, carry → carriesv nhưng play→ plays

* Negative (thể phủ định)

(I, you, we, they ) + don’t + V(inf)...
(He, she, it) + doesn’t + V(inf)....

* Interrogative ( thể nghi vấn)

Do + ( I, you, we, they) + V(inf)... ?
Does + (he , she, it) + V(inf)... ?

b. “to be”

- Afirmative

I + am

(You, we, they) + are
(He, she, it) + is

- Negative

I + am not

(You, we, they) + are not (aren’t )
(He, she , it) + is not (isn’t)

- Interrogative

</div>
(112)<div class='page_container' data-page=112>

Am + I ... ?

Are + (you, we, they).... ?
Is + (he, she , it) ... ?

c. “ to have”

(I, you, we, they) + have
(He, she, it) + has

2-Use (cách dùng)

a. Một hành động lặp đi, lặp lại, một thói quen ở hiện tại.

Thường đi với: alway, usually, sometimes/ at times, seldom(ít khi), rarely ( hiếm
khi), once, twice/three times... a week/ a month.... every/ month/ year...
Ex1: Lan goes to school by bike.

Ex2: They are usually at home on Sundays.
b. Một sự thật, một chân lý

Ex1: I live in ThaiThuy

3- Practice : Supply the correct forms of the verbs:

1. Our house ___________ (have) a small yard.
2. Lan ___________ (eat) her lunch at school.
3. Nam’s sister ___________ (work) in a factory.
4. There ___________ (be) a store near my house.

5. Thu and Vui ___________ (play) games after school.
6. They ___________ (work) in a hospital.

7. There ___________ (be) many trees and flowers in the park.
8. She ___________ (go) to bed at ten o’clock.

9. ___________ Nam’s mother (work) ___________ in a factory?
10. ___________ you (go) ___________ to school every day?
11. It ___________ (be) 12 o’clock now.

12. Minh ___________ (live) in the city with his sister.
13. We ___________ (not go) to school on Sundays.
14. I ___________ (not be) a teacher.

15. She ___________ (not brush) her teeth after meal.
16.That school __________ thirty- five classes. (have)
17.__________ there a river near your house?(be)
18.Nam __________ Literature on Friday?(not have)

19.__________ you __________ your face in the morning?(wash)
20.My mom __________ up at six.(not get)

21.__________ he __________ soccer in the afternoon?(play)
22.Does she__________ watch television in the evening?(watch)
25. Every day, Minh __________ his face.(wash)

26.We ___________ our lunch at school (eat)

27. Minh and Nga ___________ their homework in the evening. (do)
28.She ___________ in a house near a lake.( live)

</div>
(113)<div class='page_container' data-page=113>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

31.Mai ___________ a shower every morning.(take)
32.Nam ___________ English on Monday.(have)
33.She ___________ her teeth after meals. (brush)

34.Her brother and sister ___________ sports after lunch.(play)
35.___________ Nga ___________ T.V every night ( watch)
36.She ___________ to shool at 6.30 every day.(go)

37.What ___________ they ___________ after school?(play)

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

</div>
(114)<div class='page_container' data-page=114>

Period: 51

«n tËp häc kú i

a- theory

I. Aims:

 Further practice in the grammar points: simple present, present progressive,

prepositions and question words.

II. Objective

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use grammar points fluently.
III. Teaching aids:

 Textbook, ...

IV. Procedure:

The present progressive tense

1 -Formular (Công th c) ứ

I am

+ (not) +
V-ing
We/you/they are

She/he/it is

Am I

+ V-ing...?
Are We/you/they

Is She/he/it

2-Use

a. Một hành động đang diễn ra tại thời điểm nói.

Thường đi với : now, at the moment, at present, look !, listen ! , Oh!
Ex1:

Look ! she (come)...→ Look ! She is coming.
Ex2:

What... they (do)... now ? → What are they doing now ?

b. Một hành động diễn ra xung quanh thời điểm nói nhưng khơng nhất thiết đang diễn
ra ngay lúc nói.

Ex: I am writing a book

c. Một hành động diễn ra trong một tương lai gần.
Ex: They are going to the cinema tomorrow

d. Hai hành động diễn ra song song tại thời điểm nói

Ex: Our parents are at home now. My father is reading a newspaper while my mother
is cooking.

Chia động từ trong ngoặc ở thì thích hợp

1. ………… he ……….(do) morning exercises now?

2. He ……… (swim) overthere now.

3. Mr. Brown ……….. (listen) to music now?

</div>
(115)<div class='page_container' data-page=115>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

6. Minh ………(play) shess with Nam at the moment.
7. ……….she ………(study) now?

8. He ………(not be) at home now.

9. Hanh ………(not read) book at the moment.

10.They ………(plant) trees overthere at the moment.
11. Now he ………(drive) to work.

12.Look! The ball ………(fall) down.
13.It ……….(rain) now.

14. Mother ……….(cook) some food in the kitchen at the moment .

15.Where ………. You ………..(go) now? – I ……….(go) to the theater.

</div>
(116)<div class='page_container' data-page=116>

Total Out

Teaching :6a

………..

6b

...

6c ……….………

Period: 52

«n tËp häc kú i

I. Aims:

 Further practice in the grammar points: simple present, present progressive,

prepositions and question words.

II. Objective

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use grammar points fluently.

III. Teaching aids:

 Textbook, ...

IV. Procedure:

Chia động từ trong ngoặc ở thì thích hợp

1. We ………(be) student in class 8A.

2. She ………… often ………(not do) homework in the evening.
3. He usually ………(take) a taxi to the airport.

4. They ………. Usually ………(not go) to school by bike.
5. …………. They ………(be) beautiful?

6. They often ………(visit) their parents on Saturday.
7. ……….she ………(study) now?

8. My and I always ………(go) to the countryside.
9. He ………(not be) at home now.

10.Hanh ………(not read) book at the moment.

11. Our teacher usually ………(give) us many exercises.
12.He often ………(catch) a train to work.

13.The cat ………(catch) mouse.

14.They ………(plant) trees overthere at the moment.

15.My old friend, Manh ………(write) to me twice a month.
16.What she says ………(be) true.

17.Where ………….. she ………(buy) her breakfast every morning?
18.Bien ………….. often ………(not phone) to me.

19.Mrs. Green always ………(take) a bus to work. But now he
(drive) to work.

………

20.He usually ………(water) the trees in the morning.
21.She ………(not listen) to the radio now.

22.The sun …………(rise) in the East and …………. (set) in the West.

23.He ………(play) table tennis at the moment.

24.Mo and Nguyen ………(sing) the same song now.
25.They always ………(make) noise in the class.

26.Hung …………. often ………(not go) camping in the summer.
27.Hanh ………(not read) with the friends at the moment.

28.…………Son ………(write) to their friends every summer
holiday?

29.What ………….you ………..(listen) on the radio now?
30.Listen! Someone ………(cry).

</div>
(117)<div class='page_container' data-page=117>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

33.…………..you ………(see) the doctor next week.

34.Mai and Nam ………(go) to the movie theater tomorrow evening.
35.They ………(plant) trees a long this street next month.

36.…………he ………(write) to his friend next week.
37.They ……….(not be) doctor.

38.He often ………(pick) his friend up at the rain way station morning.
39.She ………(watch) a romantic film on TV this evening.

40.………you often ………(do) your homework in the evening?
41.I ………(read) an interesting novel at the moment.

42.………you usually ………(watch) TV in the evening?
43.They always ………(talk) to each other in the weekend.
44.They ………(play) soccer at the moment.

45.She ………often ………(not go) shopping on weekend.
46.They ………(not be) classmate.

47.………….he ………(be) your father?

48.…………..she ………(listen) to music now?

49.Thanh and Hung ………(read) a wonderful story at the moment.
50.Mai and Hang ………(not play) the game at the moment.

51.I often ………(wash) my clothes.
52.She ………(not be) at home now.

53.………….you often ………(write) to your friend?
54.Mr. Mai ………(water) the plant every morning.
55.We ………(meet) each other twice a month.
56.He ………(listen) to the telephone at the moment.

57.They ………….always ………(not go) to the school by train.
58.He ………(drink) beer at the bar at the moment.

59.They usually ………(sing) in the early morning.

60.…………. My and Thanh ………(talk) on the telephone now?
61.They ………(plant) trees every early year.

62.He ………(not study) Math at the moment.

63.………she ………(play) badminton every afternoon?
64.They sometime ………(do) morning exercises at 5.30.

65.Thanh and I ………(be) at home now.

66.Hung ………(run) about 5km every morning.

67.………….Hung and Minh sometime ………(meet) each other?
68.Every evening, she ………(jog) about 3km.

69.He always ………(drive) his car to work. But now, he
(ride) his mortorbike to work.

………

Total Out

Teaching :6a………

6b………

6c………
PERIOD 53: TEST ON ENGLISH

I. Objectivies:

- Remark pupils’ knownledge and get mark into teacher’s book.

II. Teaching aids:

-Teacher: the questions for the test.
- Pupils : objects for learn.

III. Practice :

- Teacher give the questions to pupils and pupils do the test individually.
( Teacher hand out the photocopies )

</div>
(118)<div class='page_container' data-page=118>

MA TRẬN ĐỀ

Nội dung Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng số

TN NL TN TL TN TL

Câu 1 4
0,5

2,0

Câu2 5

0,5

2,5

Câu3 2

0,5
4

0,5
6

3,0

Câu4 5

0,5
5

2,5
Tổng số 4

2,0

5
2,5

2
1,0

9
4,5

10,0

Class 6…………

Trêng ………..

THE FIRST TERM TEST(2009-2010)
( Subject: English; Time: 45 minutes)

I. Chọn đáp án đúng bằng cách khoanh tròn vào chữ cái A,B,C hoặc D (2đ)

1. We ……..…our English test at the moment.

A. isn’t doing B. are doing C. is doing D. am doing
2. Every moning, Hoa ………….... to school by bike .

A. travel B. don’t travel C. travels D. is traveling
3. We have English …………Tuesday, Thursday and Friday.

A. on B. at C. in D. between
4. My class room is on the ………floor.

</div>
(119)<div class='page_container' data-page=119>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Nm hc 2009 -2010

II. Hoàn thành bài hội thoại sau, điền một từ trong khung vào mỗi chỗ trống:
(2)

What plays eats play do

A: What does Minh (1) ... after school?
B: He (2) ... his lunch.

A: Does he (3) ... games?
B: Yes, he (4) ... volleyball.
A: (5)... does he do in the evening?
B: He learns English.

III. Đọc đoạn văn sau rồi trả lời câu hỏi (3đ).

Mrs Hong is a doctor. She lives in a small house in the city and works in a
hospital . The hospital is near her house so she walks to work . She starts her work at
7 o’clock and finishes at 4.30. In the evening, she stays at home. She does her
housework, waches T.V or reads books. Now, she is helping her children with their
homework. She loves her children very much.

1. Give true(T) or false(F) sentences. (1đ)

Sentences T F

1. She goes to work by bus.

2. She is helping her children to do homework now.

2. Answer the questions. (2đ)

a. Where does Mrs Hong live ?

………..
b.What time does she start her work ?

………..
c. What does she do in the evening ?

………..
d. Does she love her children ?

………..

IV. Viết một đoạn văn ngắn về trường của em (2,5đ)

- Our school / country
- It / small

- It / 2 floors

- There /10 classrooms / my school

</div>
(120)<div class='page_container' data-page=120>

- My classroom / second floor.

………
………
………

………
………
………
………
………

---Hết---Đáp án tiếng Anh 6 HKI (2009-2010)

Câu 1(2 điểm)

Nội dung Điểm

1-B
2-C
3-A
4-D

0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5

Câu 2(2,5 điểm)

Nội dung Điểm

1- do
2- eats

3- play
4- plays

</div>
(121)<div class='page_container' data-page=121>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

5- What 0,5

Câu 3 (3điểm)

Nội dung Điểm

1.

a. F
b-T

2.

a. She lives in the city.

b. She starts her work at 7 o’clock.
c. She stays at home in the evening.
d. Yes, she does.

0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5

Câu 4(2,5 điểm)

Nội dung Điểm

1- Our school is in the country.
2- It is small.

3- It has two floors.

4- There are 10 classrooms in my school.
5- My classroom is on the second floor.

0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5

Total Out

Teaching :6a………

6b………

6c………

UNIT 9: THE BODY

Period 54: PARTS OF BODY (A1 – A2)

I-Aims:

 Help students know nouns to talk about parts of body.

II-Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about parts of body.

III-Teaching aids:

 Posters and pictures
IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

1. Warm up(5’) - Answer the - Which class are you in?

</div>
(122)<div class='page_container' data-page=122>

- Ask students some
questions about them.

- Teacher – whole class.

teacher’s questions
about themselves.
- Students –
Teacher.

- Where do you live?

- Is there a rice paddy near
your house?

2. Pactice(33’)

 Elicit vocabulary

- Use the picture to
introduce parts of the body.
- Say new words as pointing
to the picture and ask
students to repeat.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.
- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

UNIT 9: THE BODY
Period 54: PARTS OF

BODY (A1 – A2)
1-Vocabulary:

- a head : đầu.
- a hand : b n tay. à
- a shoulder(s) : vai.
- a finger : ngón tay.
- a foot : b n à chân
- a leg : chân

- a chest : ngực

 Rub out and

remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat
chorally and
remember all the
English words.
- Call the English
words and write
the English words
if there is time.

 Checking vocabulary:

 Pictures drill

- Run through the pictures.
- Hold up the first picture
and say the model sentences:

+What’s that? / What are
those?.

+That is a head .

+ Those are shoulders .

- Do the same for the
seccond picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the
pictures.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat it chorally

and then

individually.

- Make the
sentence for
themselves.

- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs
practice in front.

2. Practice: A1 (page 96)

a) a head
b) hand
c) shoulders
d) chest

e) a finger
f) a foot
g) a leg

 Nought and crosses

- Put the grid on the board.
- Divide class into teams.
One is noughts (O) and the
other is Crosses (X).

- Two teams choose any
things in the boxes and ask
questions about what things
are .

- The team which has three

- Look at the
board.

- Work in groups.
- One is noughts
(O) and the other
is Crosses (X).
- Choose any
phrases in the
boxes, ask and ask
questions about

3.Further practice:

chest hands foot
finger

</div>
(123)<div class='page_container' data-page=123>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

noughts or three crosses on a
line will win the game.

where they live :

+What’s

that?/What are
those?

+That is his head.
+ Those are his
shoulders .

- Congratulate the
winner.

arm head shoulders

3. Consolidation(5’)

- Ask students to learn by
heart parts of the body and
how to talk about them.
Have them prepare Unit 9
-: Adjectives to describe
physical appearance.

4. Homework(2’):

- Parts of the body.
- A1, page 96:
- What’s that?

- That is ……… . 
 - What are those?

-Those are ………

- Unit 9: The body:A3 – A4.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the
teacher requests.

- Write down.

Total Out

Teaching :6a………

6b………

6c………

UNIT 9 : THE BODY

Period 55 (A3 – A4)

I-Aims:

 Using adjectives to describe physical appearance.
II-Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to describe the

form of a person.

III-Teaching aids:

 Poster and cassette

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

1. Warm up(5’)
- Shark’s attack

- Divide the class into two
teams.

- Work in
teams.

-Look at the

C H E S T

- Shoulders feet legs

</div>
(124)<div class='page_container' data-page=124>

- Ask each team for a letter
in the alphabet.

- Ask students from each
team to guess the word.
- The game countinues until
students find out the word.

board.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Give a letter
in the alphabet.
- Have to try to
guess the word.
- Find out the
word.

- fingers arm chest

UNIT 9 : THE BODY

Period 55(A3 – A4)

2. Pactice(33’)

- Elicit vocabulary

- Use the picture to
introduce physical
appearance.

- Say new words as pointing
to the picture and ask
studentsto repeat.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after
the teacher.
- Notice the
main stress
pattern.

- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- short (adj) : thấp.
- tall (adj) : cao.

- thin(adj) : gầy.
- fat (adj) : mập, béo.

- heavy (adj) : nặng
- light (adj) : nhẹ

 Slap the board

- Put the Vietnamese
translation on the board.
- Call two students of two
teams to the front of the
class.

- Call out one of English
words in loud voice.

 Group

works.
- Say the
Vietnamese
translation .
- Run forward
and slap the
correct words
on the board.
- Continue until
students have
slapped all the
words.

 Checking vocabulary:

thấp.

gầy.

mập, béo cao

nặng nhẹ

 Dialogue build.

- Set the scene.

- Read the dialogue and
write few key words on the
board to help students
remember what the two
speaker in the dialogue say
to each other .

- Get students to write in the
missing words on the board.
- Get students to isolate the
model sentence.

-Answer
teacher’s
questions.
- Look at the
board and

listen to the
teacher

carefully.

- Reproduce
the dialogue
from the cues.
- Build the

2- Dialogue build
Nam: Who is that ?

Lien: That’s Chi .

Nam: What does she do ?

Lien: She’s a gymnast.

Ba: Is she short?

Lan: No, she isn’t. She’s tall
 S + be + adjective

- Adjective (adj): short, tall,
thin, fat, heavy, light, strong,
weak, ……

</div>
(125)<div class='page_container' data-page=125>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

dialogue until it
is memorized.
- Write in the
missing words
on the board.

voùc.

 Word cue drill

- Run through the cues.
- Hold up the first cues and
say the model sentences.

- What does she / he look
like ?

-She is short .
- He is fat.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the
cues.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat it
chorally and

then

individually.
- Make the
sentence for
themselves.
- Practice in
pairs.

- Some pairs
practice in
front.

3. Practice:

- She / short - They / light

- He / fat - We / heavy
- Nam / thin

- Mai and Lan / tall

 Predict Grid

- Set the scene: You are
going to listen to about the
forms of persons in the
pictures .

- Have students copy the
table.

- Get students to guess about
the forms of persons in the
pictures.

- Let them listen to the
cassette.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Pay attention
to the teacher’s
explanation.
- Students
copy the table.
- Guess about
the forms of
persons in the
pictures.

- Listen to the
cassette and

give the

answers.

4. Further practice:A4(p 98)
Pictur

e

tall / short

/ fat / thin Listen

a thin, tall (4)

b short, fat (3)

c tall, fat (2)

d short, fat (1)

3. Consolidation(5’)

- Ask students to learn by
heart adjectives and How
to decribe physical
appearance.

Have them prepare Unit 9
-Lesson 3:(B1): Face
vocabulary to describe faces.

- Take notes

and memorize
- Do as the
teacher

suggests.

</div>
(126)<div class='page_container' data-page=126>

4. Homework(2’):

- Adjectives.

- S + be + adjective.
- Unit 9: The Body

-FACES : B1-3.

- Write down.

Total Out

Teaching :6a………

6b………

6c………

UNIT 9: THE BODY

Period 57: FACES (B1 – B3)

I-Aims:

 Adjectives of colour to describe features.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to describe the

main colors of hair or skin.

III. Teaching aids:

 Pictures and cassette

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

1. Check up (5’):

- How to decribe physical
appearance.

2. Warm up(3’)

 Jumbled words

-Write numbers whose

- Come to the

board to answer.
-Look at the
board.

- yees = eyes
- hari = hair
- cefa = face
- spli = lips
- sone = nose

- dreshouls = shoulders

</div>
(127)<div class='page_container' data-page=127>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

letters are in disorder.
- Divide the class into two
teams.

- Ask students from each
team to go to the board
and write the correct
words .

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Work in teams.
- Go to the board
and write the
correct words.

(One word, one
student).

Period 57: (B1 – B3)

3. Pactice(30’)

 Elicit vocabulary

- Use a chat of colors to
show and tell the name of
each color.

- Ask them to repeat the
new words as pointing to
the colors.

- Ask them to retell the
names of colors.

- Ask them to write the
new words in their
notebooks

- Look at the chat
of colors and
listen to the
teacer.

- Repeat the new

words and look at
the points the
teacher shows.
- Retell the names
of colors.

- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- black (adj) : màu đen.
- yellow (adj) : maøu vaøng.
- white (adj) : màu trắng.
- green (adj) : màu xanh lục.
- gray (adj) : màu xám.
- blue (adj) : màu xanh
dương.

- red (adj) : màu đỏ.
- brown (adj) : màu nâu.
- orange (adj) : màu cam.
- purple (adj) : màu tím.

 Real things

- Show things around and
ask students to say the
names of the color

- Try to say the
colors as the
teacher asks. Say
as many colors as
possible.

- red - blue
- yellow - white
- green - black

 Rub out &

remember dialogue
- Set the scene: Lan is
asking Nga about her doll.
- Put the dialogue on the
board .

- Rub out some of the
words .

- Get students to isolate
the model sentence.

- Ask students some
questions :

+ What color is her
hair ?

+ What color are her
eyes ?

- Practice saying
the dialogue.
- Remember te
rubbed out words

and keep

practicing it.
- Repeat the
rubbed out
dialogue from
memory.

- Isolate the
model sentence.
- Answer the
questions

+ It’s black.

+ They are

2-Target language: 
Nga: I have a new doll.

Lan: What color is her hair?.

Nga: It’ s black.

Lan: What color are her eyes?

Nga: They are brown.

- What color + is / are + S ?
 - It is + Color ( maøu saéc).
 - They are + Color ( màu
sắc).

- Màu gì ……… ?
- Hỏi về màu sắc.

</div>
(128)<div class='page_container' data-page=128>

brown

- Copy the notes
and memorize.

 Picture drill

- Run through the
pictures.

- Hold up the first picture
and say the model
sentences:

+What color is his

hair ?

+ It’s green.

- Do the same for the
seccond picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the
pictures.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat it
chorally and then
individually.
- Make the
sentence for
themselves.

- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs
practice in front.

3. Practice: B1 (page 100)

- hair / green / eyes / yellow

- hair / brown / eyes / green
- hair / red / eyes / black

 Guessing game.

- Show them the pictures.
Ask them to choose one
of the pictures.

- Get the rest of the class
to guess which picture
they choose. The first
student guesses the house
correctly comes up to the
front, chooses a new
picture and the game
continues.

- Ask them to listen to the
cassette and try to find out
which picture it is.

- Students look at
the pictures and
choose one of
them the teacher
shows .

- The rest of the
class asks him or
her question to
find which picture
he or she chooses.

* Does he / she
have a black
hair?

* Yes, he / she
does.

* No, he/ she
doesn’t.

- Listen and try
to find out which
picture it is.

4. Further practice:

- a) hair / black / eyes / green
- b) hair / black / eyes / black
- c) eyes / yellow / hair / brown
- d) eyes / yellow / hair / red
- e) hair / red / eyes / green

4. Consolidation(5’)

- Ask students to learn by
heart adjectives of color
to describe features.

5.Homework(2’):

- Adjectives of colors.
- What color + is / are
+ S ?

It is + Color ( màu

- Take notes and
memorize

</div>
(129)<div class='page_container' data-page=129>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

sắc).

They are + Color ( màu
sắc).

- Unit 9: The Body –

FACES: B4 – B6.

- Write down.

Total Out

Teaching :6a………

6b………

6c………

UNIT 9: THE BODY

Period 58: FACES (B4 – 6)

I-Aims:

 Further practice in Body vocabulary to describe people.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use Body vocabulary to

describe people by reading the text.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cassette and pictures.

IV. Procedure:

</div>
(130)<div class='page_container' data-page=130>

Giáo án tiếng Anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content

1. Warm up(5’)

 Listen

- Let students listen to the
song “ Head and Shoulders,
Knees and Toes”

- Have them sing the song
again.

- Listen to the
song “ Head and
Shoulders, Knees
and Toes”.

- Some sing the
song again.

B6 – page 102

UNIT 9: THE BODY

Period 58

FACES (B4 – 6)

2. Pactice(33’)

- Open prediction

- Set the scene: You are
going to read about Miss Chi.
Guess how Miss Chi’s
appearance.

- Point to the missing
passage and ask: + How is
Miss Chi / her face / hair /
eyes / nose / lips/… ?
- Ask students to write three
things in their books.

- Listen to the
teacher and
answer the
questions:

- Students to
write Miss Chi’s
appearance in
their books :
Short, round,
long, brown ,
amall , white,
………
……

1. Pre reading:

Miss Chi is (1)

____________ and thin. She 
has a (2) ____________ face,

(3) ________ blackhair, (4)

________

eyes, a (5) ___________ nose,

(6) ____

________ lips and small (7)

_________
teeth .
- Ask students to read the text

on page 101 and check their
predictions.

- Get students to answer the
questions about Miss Chi :

 Lucky numbers

- Write the numbers on the
board.

- Divide class into teams. The
teams take turn to choose the
numbers.

- Tell students that they have
to answer the questions .

- Read the text
and check their
predictions.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Try to ask and
answer the
questions about
Miss Chi to make

sure that

everybody in
class understand
how Miss Chi is.
- Look at the
board.

- Work in teams.
- Take turn to
choose the
numbers.

- Answer the
questions.

2. While reading:

B4 – page 101

1) tall 4) brown 7)

white

2) round 5) small
3) long 6) thin

 Reading comprehension

1 2 3 4 5 6
7

1 b) What color is her hair?

2 Lucky number.

3 d) Is her nose big or small?

4 e) Are her lips full or thin?

5 Lucky number.

6 a) Is Miss Chi’s hair long or
short?

7 c) What color are her eyes?

 Ordering pictures

- Ask students to look at the
pictures in B5 on page 102.
- Let students listen to the
cassette and put the pictures
in correct order by numbering

- Look at the
pictures on page
102.

- Students listen
to the cassette and
put the pictuers in

3.Post reading:

B5 , page 102

No hai

r

face nose lips
1 sho roun big Full

</div>
(131)<div class='page_container' data-page=131>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a………

6b………

6c………..………..………

UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY

Period 59: HOW DO YOU FEEL? (A1- 4)

I-Aims:

 Help students know how to talk about feelings.

II. Objective:

 At the end, students can express their feelings.

III. Teaching aids:

 Pictures

IV. Procedure:

</div>
(132)<div class='page_container' data-page=132>

Giáo án tiếng Anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

1. Warm up(5’)

 Mapped dialogue

- Put the dialogue on the
board which is only words.
The words are cues.

- Model the dialogue.

- Run through the cues like a
drill with the whole class.

- Look at the
board and listen
to the teacher.
- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Practice the
dialogue in pair .
- Some pairs
practice in front.
- Rewrite the
dialogue .

Lan  Nam


How many/
… ?

- your B / tall ?
- short hair ?
- color / hair ?
nose/big/small?
- color / eyes?

4:F,M,B
and me
Yes.
X.
brown
small.
blue.
2. Pactice(33’)

 Elicit vocabulary
 Situation

 Visual
 Translation
 Situation
 Mime
 Antonym

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the
main stress
pattern.

- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- hungry (adj) : đói.
- thirsty (adj) : khát.
- full (adj) : no.
- tired (adj) : mệt.
- cold (adj) : lạnh.
- hot (adj) : nóng .

 Rub out and remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat
chorally and
remember all the
English words.
- Call the
English words
and write the
English words if
there is time.

 Checking vocabulary:

 Presentation picture.

- Show students the pictures
and ask them questions:

+ What ‘s he / she
doing?

+ What ‘s she doing?

+ How does he feel?
 + How does she feel?
 + How do you feel?

- Explain the meanings of the
questions and help them to
answer / express their
feelings.

- Let them take notes and
memorize.

- Look at the
pictures and
listen to the
teacher’s

questions.

- Try to answer
the questions.
+ He’s
eating.

+ He’s
hungry.

+ She’s
drinking.

+ She’s thirty.

2- Target language:

A1,2 P 104 -105

- How do you feel?
- I’m hungry.

- How does he feel?
- He feels hot.

- How does she feel?
- She feels cold.

How do / does + S +
feel?

S + am / is / are +
adjective

- Cảm giác như thế
nào ?

</div>
(133)<div class='page_container' data-page=133>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a………

6b………

6c………

UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY

Period 60: HOW DO YOU FEEL? (A5-7)

I-Aims:

 Reading a dialogue to recognize Polite Offers and Requests with “ Would like”

and practice “ What would he / she like…… ?”.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask questions and answer

“What would he/ she like .…….. ?

III. Teaching aids:

 Poster and textbook.

IV. Procedure:

</div>
(134)<div class='page_container' data-page=134>

Giáo án tiếng Anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

1. Check up (5’)

- Polite Offers and Requests
with “What...like?

2. warm up (3’)
 Chatting

- Ask students some
questions about their class.
- Teacher – whole class.

- Come to the
board to answer.
- Answer the
teacher’s

questions about
their class.

- Students –
Teacher.

- How do you feel?
- Are you hot?

- Are you thirsty?

UNIT 10

STAYING HEALTHY
Period 60: HOW DO

YOU FEEL? (A5-7)

3. Practice(30’)

 Elicit vocabulary
 Situation
 Translation
 Situation

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.
- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- Noodles (unc) : buùn, miến.
- to like : thích.

- a drink : thức uống.

 Rub out and

remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat
chorally and
remember all the
English words.
- Call the English
words and write
the English
words if there is
time.

 Predict dialogue

- Set the scene: Lan is
talking to Nam about her
classmate.

- Put the dialogue on the
board. Some of the words
are missing.

- Ask students to guess what
the missing words are.
- Ask students to read the
dialogue and check their
predictions.

* Grid

- Ask students to read the
dialogue again and complete
the table.

* Lucky numbers

- Write the numbers on the

- Listen to the

teacher.

- Read the
dialogue.

- Guess what the
missing words
are.

2-Predict dialogue
Nam: How do you feel?

Lan: I’m (1) ______ and (2)
_______ .

Nam: What would you like?

Lan: I’d like some (3) _______ .
What about you?

Nam: I’m (4) ______ . I’d like
some (5) _______ .

- Students read
the dialogue and
check their
predictions.
- Read the
dialogue again
and complete the

table.

- Look at the

3 .While reading:

A3, page 105

1- hot 4- hungry
2- thirsty 5- noodles
3- orange juice

Name
s
Feelings Would
like
Lan hot, 
thirsty 
orange 
juice

Nam hungry noodles

</div>
(135)<div class='page_container' data-page=135>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Total Out

Teaching :6a………

6b………

6c………

UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY

Period 61: B1-3 FOOD and drink

I. Aims:

 Some, any with there is / are, positive, negative and Yes / No questions to talk

about Food and drink.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to use “some”

and“any”.

III. Teaching aids:

 Poster and cards.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

1. warm up (5’)
 Networks

- Write a network on the

board and put some more
words below it.

- Get students to think of
food and drink.

- Get students to put the
given words in the
appropriate circles

- Give feedback.

- Students to think
of the town and
country.

- Go to the board
and fill in the
remaining empty
circles with their
own words.

rice milk

fruit life
 food 
 meat

chicken

UNIT 10

STAYING HEALTHY

Period 61: B1-3

FOOD and drink

2. Practice(33’)

 Elicit vocabulary

- Use pictures to introduce
new words .

- Have some students say
the names of food and drink
the teacher show.

- Listen and look
at things shown
by the teacher.
- Try to say the
names of food
and drink shown.
- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- an apple : quả táo.
- an orange : quả cam.
- a banana : quả chuối.
- water (unc) : nước.

 What and where

- Elicit the vocabulary from
the students and write them
in the circles.

- Get students to repeat the
words including the rubbed
out words by pointing at the

- Students repeat
chorally and
remember all the
words.

- Go to the board
and fill in the

banana apple

water

orange
 noodles

</div>
(136)<div class='page_container' data-page=136>

empty circle. circles with the
right words.

 Rub out & remember

dialogue

- Set the scene: Phuong and
Thu are talking about food
and drink.

- Put the dialogue on the
board .

- Rub out some of the words
.

- Get students to isolate the
model sentence.

- Point to the model
sentence and ask :

+ What’s this ?

+ What comes
after……… ?

+ Is it a negative
sentence?...

- Practice saying
the dialogue.
- Remember te
rubbed out words

and keep

practicing it.
- Repeat the
rubbed out
dialogue from
memory.

- Isolate the
model sentence.
- Listen to the
teacher and
answer the
questions:

+ There is / are

+ some / any

+ No

- Take notes.

2-Target language:

B2, page 109

Phuong: What’s for lunch?.

Thu: There’s some meat and 
some rice.

Phuong: Are there any noodles?

Thu: No.There aren’t any 
noodles.

Phuong: Is there any fruit?

Thu: Yes. There is some 
fruit………

(+) There is/are + some 
+noun.

(?) Is/are there + any + noun?
 (-) There is/are + not + any +

N.

-Có.../Có không?/Không
có…

- Some (+) / Any (?, - ) : một
vài / ít.

 Word cue drill

- Run through the cues.
- Hold up the first cues and
say the model sentences.

- Is there any water?.

- Yes. There is some water.
- Are there any bananas?
- No. There aren’t any
bananas.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the
cues.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat it

chorally and then
individually.
- Make the
sentence for
themselves.

- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs
practice in front.

3. Practice:

 B3, page 109
 - water / (+)

- bananas / (-)
- rice / (-)

- oranges / (+)
- milk / (+)
- apples / (-)

 Guessing game.

- Show them the pictures.
Ask them to choose one of
the pictures.

- Get the rest of the class to
guess which picture they

choose. The first student

- Students look at
the pictures and
choose one of
them the teacher
shows .

- The rest of the
class asks him or

4. Further practice:

</div>
(137)<div class='page_container' data-page=137>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

guesses the food / drink
correctly comes up to the
front, chooses a new picture
and the game continues.

her question to
find which picture
he or she chooses.

* Is there any
water?

* Yes. There is
some water.

* No. There isn’t
any water.

- d) water
- e) vegetables

3. Consolidation(5’)
- repeat the content of the
lesson again.

4.Homework(2’):

- Vocabulary (some food
and drink)

- (+) There is/are + some
+noun.

(?) Is/are there + any +
noun?

(-) There is/are + not +
any + N.

- Unit 10: Staying

Healthy – MY FAVORITE 
FOOD - Lesson 5 : B4-6.

- Take notes and

memorize

- Do as the
teacher suggests.
- Write down.

Total Out

Teaching :6a………

6b………

6c………

</div>
(138)<div class='page_container' data-page=138>

UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY

Period 62 : FOOD AND DRINK B4-6

I. Aims :

 Help students use uncountable and plural nouns, Polite requests “ I’d like some

……..”and Polite offers “ What would you like ?”

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use nouns and tell what they

ould like.

III. Teaching aids:

 Poster

</div>
(139)<div class='page_container' data-page=139>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

1. warm up (5’)

 Nought and crosses

- Put the grid on the board.
- Divide class into teams.
One is noughts (O) and the
other is Crosses (X).

- Two teams choose any
words in the boxes and ask
questions about feelings .
- The team which has three
noughts or three crosses on a
line will win the game.

- Look at the
board.

- Work in

groups.

- One is noughts
(O) and the other
is Crosses (X).
- Choose any
words in the
boxes, ask and
ask questions
about feelings :

+How do you
feel/ does he
feel?.

+I’m / He’s
thirsty.

UNIT 10

STAYING HEALTHY

Period 62 : B4-6

2. Practice(33’)

 Elicit vocabulary

- Use some fruits and
pictures to introduce new
words .

- Have some students say the
names of food and drink the
teacher shows.

- Use pictures to explain the
meaning of the words:
chicken, rice, fish, meat,
milk, fruit.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Try to say the
names of food
and drink shown
by the teacher.
- Notice the
meaning of the
words.

- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1 -Vocabulary:

- chicken (unc) : thịt gà.
- rice (unc) : cơm, gạo.
- a fish : cá.

- bread (unc) : bánh mì.
- meat (unc) : thòt.

- vegetables (n) : rau cải.
- milk (unc) : sữa.

-fruit (unc) : trái cây.

- orange juice (unc) : nước cam.

 What and where

- Elicit the vocabulary from
the students and write them
in the circles.

- Get students to repeat the
words including the rubbed
out words by pointing at the
empty circle.

- Students repeat
chorally and
remember all the
words.

- Go to the board
and fill in the
circles with the

right words.
 
chicken
fish
bread
meat
milk

fruit orange juice

 Presentation text.

- Ask students to read the
dialogue in B4 on page 110
and answer the questions :
+ Where are they?
 + How does he feel?.
 + Does he want any
chicken?

+ What does he ask her?

- Isolate the model sentences
by underlining the model

- Listen to the
teacher’s

explanation.

- Read the
statements.

- Answer the
questions.

- Understand of
the target
language in term

2- Target language:

 A6(page 99)

A- I’m hungry. I’d like some
chicken and some rice. What
would you like?

B- I’m not hungry, but I’m
thirsty. I’d like some orange
juice.

What would you like?
 I’d like some + noun

- ’d like (would like) :

139

hungr

y full hot
cool tired happy

</div>
(140)<div class='page_container' data-page=140>

Total Out

Teaching :6a………

6b………

6c………

UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY

Period 63: my favorite food ( C1-5)

I. Aims:

 Help students how to speak about their favorite food to contrast “Would you

like…… ?”

with “Do you like….?”.

II. Objective:

 At the end, students will be able to use the verb “like” to speak about their

favorite
food.

III. Teaching aids:

 Poster and pictures.

</div>
(141)<div class='page_container' data-page=141>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

1. warm up (5’)
 Kim’s game

- Have students look at the
poster of food / drink and
try to remember as many
words as possible.

- Divide class into two
groups.

- Put away the poster and
ask students to go to the
board and write the words
they’ve seen from memory.
- The group having the
most right English words is
the winner.

- Look at the

pictures of Ba’s
and Chi’s house
(Page 76, 77) in
20 seconds and
try to remember

as many

facilities as
possible.

- Work in
groups.

- Put away the
pictures and ask
students to go to
the board and

write the

facilities they’ve

seen from

memory.
- Congratulate.

UNIT 10

STAYING HEALTHY

Period 63: my favorite

food ( C1-5)

2. Practice(33 )’

 Elicit vocabulary

- Use some fruits and
pictures to introduce new
words .

- Have some students say
the names of food and
drink the teacher shows.
- Use pictures to explain
the meaning of the words:
lettuce, pea, bean, onion,
………

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Try to say the
names of food
and drink shown
by the teacher.
- Notice the
meaning of the

words.

- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- a carrot : củ cà rốt.
- a bean : hạt đậu .
- a tomato : quả cà chua.
- lettuce (unc) : rau xà lách.
- a potato : củ khoai tây.
- a pea : đậu hạt tròn.
- a cabbage : bắp cải.
- an onion : củ hành.

 Rub out and

remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat
chorally and

remember all the
English words.
- Call the
English words
and write the
English words if
there is time.

* Checking vocabulary:

 Predict dialogue

- Set the scene: Nhan is
asking Mai about What her
favorite food is.

- Put the dialogue on the
board. Some of the words
are missing.

- Ask students to guess

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Read the
dialogue.

- Guess what the
missing words
are.

2- Target language: C2, page 
112

Nhan: What’s your favorite
food, Mai?

Mai: I like (1) (fish). .

Nhan: Do you like vegetables?

Mai: (2)(yes) , I (3) (do).

Nhan: Do you like (4)

</div>
(142)<div class='page_container' data-page=142>

Total Out

Teaching :6a………

6b………

6c………

UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?

Period 64: AT THE STORE (A1)

I. Aims:

 Help students know Quantifies (kilo of …… ) and Containers ( a bottle of ……

) to talk about things people buy at the store.

II. Objective:

 At the end, students will be able to use quantifies and containes to talk about

things people buy at the store.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cards and poster.

</div>
(143)<div class='page_container' data-page=143>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

1. warm up (5’)
 Guessing game.

- Show them some
drinks. Ask them to
choose one of them.
- Get the rest of the class

to guess which drink they
choose. The first student
guesses the drink
correctly comes up to the
front, chooses a new
words and the game
continues.

- Students look
at the pictures
and choose one
of the drinks
the teacher
shows

- The rest of
the class asks
him or her
question to find
which drink he
or she chooses.

* Does he / she
like ?

* Yes, he / she
does.

* No,he / she
doesn’t.

- Lemonade

- Soda
- Iced - tea
- Coffee

UNIT 11

WHAT DO YOU EAT?

Period 64

AT THE STORE (A1)

2. Practice(33 )’

 Elicit vocabulary

- Show things in the
picture and read their
names aloud.

+ What’s this?

+ How can you say it in
Enghlish?

- Aks students to repeat.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after
the teacher.
- Notice the
main stress
pattern.

- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- an egg : trứng.

- Cooking oil : dầu ăn.
- Beef (unc) : thịt bò .
- Soap (unc) : cà phê.

- Tooth paste (unc) : kem đánh
răng.

- a chocolate : soâ coâ la

 Slap the board

- Put the Vietnamese
translation on the board.
- Call two students of two
teams to the front of the
class.

- Call out one of
English words in loud
voice.

 Group

works.
- Say the
Vietnamese
translation .
- Run forward
and slap the
correct words
on the board.
- Continue until
students have
slapped all the
words.

 Checking vocabulary:

 Matching

- Put the pictures and

English words on the
board.

-Ask students to match
English words with the
pictures .

- Ask students to work in
teams.

 Group

works.
- Lookl at the
board.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Work in
teams.

- Come to the

200 grams of
10 kilos of
abar of

a can of
a box of

a packet of
a tube of
a dozen of
a bottle of
143
thịt bò
Trứng
Kem
đánh
răng

</div>
(144)<div class='page_container' data-page=144>

Total Out

Teaching :6a………

6b………

6c………

UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?

Period 65: AT THE STORE (A2)

I. Aims:

 Help students develop their listening skill.

II. Objective:

 At the end, students will be able to listen specific information about qualities

for food shopping.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cassette and textbook.

</div>
(145)<div class='page_container' data-page=145>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

1. Check up ()

- vocabulary: Quantifies
and containers.

 Bingo

- Put the table on the
board.

-Ask students to choose
any five words and copy
them into their books.
- Let students listen to
the cassette and correct.

- Read the words
in the table.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Choose any five
words.

- Put ticks next to
the words that
they listen to.
- Shouts “Bingo”.

- beef - bottle
- egg - tea

- dozen - water
- oil - gram
- rice - chocolate

 Elicit vocabulary
 Transltion
 Situation
 Situation
 Visual
 Translation

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the

teacher.

- Notice the main
stress pattern.
- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- to need : caàn.

- How much / How many : bao
nhieâu.

- Can I hepl you? : Tôi có thể
giúp gì

cho baïn ?
- Half (a kilo) : 1/2

- a cookie : banh qui gai.

 Rub out and

remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat
chorally and
remember all the
English words.
- Call the English
words and write
the English words
if there is time.

 Checking vocabulary:

 Predict dialogue

- Set the scene:
+ Where is Ba?

+ What does he
want?

+ How much / many
……?

- Put the dialogue on the
board. Some of the
words are missing.

- Ask students to guess
what the missing words
are.

- Listen to the
teacher.

-Answer the
teacher’s

questoins.

- Read the
dialogue.

- Guess what the
missing words
are.

- Students give
their prediction.

(poster)A2, page 112

Salesgirl: Can I hepl you?

Ba: Yes, I’d like some (1) ___ , 
please.

Salesgirl: How much do you

want?

Ba: (2) ______ grams , please.

Salesgirl: Is there any things else
?

Ba: Yes, I need some (3)___ .

Salesgirl: How many do you
want?

Ba: (4) ______ , please.

- Get students to listen
to the tape 2 times .
- Correct their
prediction.

- Ask students to listen
the tape again, then
answer the questions.

- Listen to the
tape two times.
- Check their
prediction.

- Listen the tape
again . Then

answer the

2- listening:

1. beef 3. eggs
 2. 200 4. a 
dozen

 Comprehension question
 a. At the store d. a dozen
b. beef

</div>
(146)<div class='page_container' data-page=146>

UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?

Period 66: AT THE STORE (A3 -4 )

A-Teaching points

 Listening for specific about quantifiers ( a kilo of and containers …)for food

shoping

B-Teaching aids :

 Textbooks, cards, poster.
C-Procedure :

Teacher’s activities Pupils’ activities The content on the board

I-Warm-up :

 Pelmanism

Showing cards and asks:
?Can you guess which
activities

?How do you play it

?Work in 2 groups-choose a

Work in 2 groups to
find out

quantifieess and
containers with rui
table nouns

</div>
(147)<div class='page_container' data-page=147>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

pair of number to find out
quantifier with suitable nouns

II- Pre listening
1.Pre-teach:

 Elicits words from Ps.

- Can I help you ?
( explanation)

-to want? ( traslation)
-(to) need (explanation)
- How much ( explample)
- Checks: R.O.R

2. Predict dialogue

Sets the rcene \: Ba is at the
stáe to know what are they
talking about I have a
dialogue with some gaps
? guess the words to
complete the dialogue
Runs through the dialogue.

III. While - Listening

?Listen to the dialogue and
check your guessing

Plays the tape twice

? Work in pairs to discuss
your answers

? Which strure is new in the

dialogue

? Meaning
? form

Which activities can you
guess

I have 6 numbers in which,
there are 2 lucky numbers and
4 QS

? How do you play this game
1a; 2- LN; 3- b; 4-c; 5 LN;
6-d

? Look at the picture A3 and

Copy the titfe
Guessing the
meaning of
newworols

Liten and answes
Liten and repeat
chous and

Indivi dually

Giving the meaning

the from and how to
use them.

Listen to Is
expla-nation

Read the dialogue
and guess the words
to coplete the

dialogue
Listen to the
dialogue

And heck their
guessing

Work in pairs to
discuss their
Indirgclual work.
Gining the meaning
the fom.

Copy model
sentences in their
notebooks.

1.Vocabulary

“ Can I help you ?

-(to) want: muốn
-(to) need: cần

-How much: bao nhiêu
- uncoun table noun
- How many? Bao nhiªu
( countable

2.Predict dialogue

S: Can I help you ?
Ba: Yes , Id like some(1)
pleas

S: How much do you want?
Ba (2): grams, please
S. Is there anything else?
Ba, yes, I need some(3)
S: How many do you want?
Ba: (4) ……., please

Answer keys.
1. bey
2. 200
3. eggs
4. a dozen

3. Model sentenees

I need / want some bey.

How much do you need/ want?
I need / want some eggs

How many do you want /
need

Meaning:

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

A bottle of water

A bar soap

147

chocolates
A tube of

A box of

toothpaster

meat
A kilo of

</div>
(148)<div class='page_container' data-page=148>

prrecdiet the name with thing
they like.

? Listen and check your
guessing Ph¬ng wants a tube
of toothpaste

Ly wantsa abar of tooth paste

IV. Port listening

You’se going to lesten to the
dialuge between Nam and his
mom. His mom wants him to
buy 4 things that she needs at
the store

? Gueess 4 things she needs
? Listen and cheek your
guesing

Feedbacks

V. Homeworks:

-Learn by heart all new
words

-Do exercises

-Prepare new lesson:
B1-3-4

Lucky number
lestening

Work in paiss to
discuss their
answers

Individual work
guess 4 things that
Nam’s mother
wants him to buy at
the store

Listen ti the

dialogue and check
their guessin

Form: How much + do
/does + S + uncoutable
How many + do/ does +S +
coutable noun?

4. Comprehension 
questions

 ( Lucky Number)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Matching.

Name guess Chek
Ph¬ng

Ly
Mai
Nam

d
e,a
b
c

5.Open prediction

guess Check
1

2
3
4

</div>
(149)<div class='page_container' data-page=149>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?

Period 67 : AT THE CANTEEN (B1-4)

I. Aims:

 Help students practice offers and requests for food and drink, using “ a, an and

some”.

II. Objective:

 At the end, students might practice offers and requests more fluently.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cassette and textbook.

IV. Procedure:

</div>
(150)<div class='page_container' data-page=150>

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

 Kim’s game

- Have students look at the
picture of food / drink in
B1 on page119 and try to
remember as many words
as possible.

- Divide class into two
groups.

- Put away the picture and
ask students to go to the
board and write the words
they’ve seen from
memory.

- The group having the
most right English words is
the winner.

- Look at the
picture of food

and drink

(B1,Page 119) in
20 seconds and
try to remember
as many words as
possible.

- Work in groups.
- Put away the
picture and ask
students to go to
the board and
write things
they’ve seen from
memory.

- Congratulate.

 Presentation pictures

- Show students the picture
.

- Say the model sentences:
+ What would you like for

breakfast?

+ I’d like some milk.

+ What would you like for

lunch?

+ I’d like some rice , fish
and abanana .

- Students read
the dialogue in
A2 on page 116
again .

- Make the
questions to

isolate the model
sentence:

-How much beef
do you

want?

-How many eggs
do you want?

1 .Presentation:

 B3 on page 119

- What would you like for

breakfast?

- I’d like some milk and a

banana.

- What would you like for

lunch?

- I’d like some meat, vegetables
and an orange.

- What would you like for + 
N(meal)?

- I’d like some / a / 
an………

- Bạn dùng gì cho bữa ăn
………?.

- Tôi muốn

……….

 Picture drill

- Run through the pictures.
- Hold up the first picture
and say the model
sentences:

+What would you like for
 lunch?

+ I’d like some meat, rice
and

vegetables.

- Do the same for the
seccond picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the
pictures.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat it
chorally and then
individually.
- Make the
sentence for
themselves.
- Practice in
pairs.

- Some pairs
practice in front.

2. Practice:

- rice - soda

- noodles - meat
- bananas - fish

- milk -
vegetables

 Survey

- Get students to fill in their
real names and what time
they do the following
things.

- Get them to practice in
pairs:

+ What would you like for
…?

+ I ‘d like some / a / an
……….

- Feedback.

- Fill in their
real names and
what time they
do the following
things.

- Practice in

pairs.

- Tell the
teacher what
they have asked
their partner,
e.g.“Lan would
like some milk
and bread for
her

breakfast………

3.Further practice:

- Ask students to learn
vocabulary and offers /
requests for food and drink.
- Have them prepare Unit
11 - L 5 :(B5,6):Talking
about prices of food and
drink with “How
much…?”

4.Homework:

- Food and drink.

- What would you like
for breakfast /

lunch / dinner ?
I’d like some / a / an

...

- Unit 11: What do you
eat? – AT THE CANTEEN

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the
teacher
suggests.
150
rice noodle
s
beef
chicke
n
fish vegetables
orang
es
banan
as
orange
juice
milk soda water

What would you like for….? Name
break-fast lunch dinner

</div>
(151)<div class='page_container' data-page=151>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?

Period 68 : AT THE CANTEEN (B5-6)

I. Aims:

 Talking about prices for food and drink with “ How much ………”.

II. Objective:

 At the end, students might use “ How much ……… “ to talk about prices.

III. Teaching aids:

 Poster and textbook.

IV. Procedure:

</div>
(152)<div class='page_container' data-page=152>

Giáo án tiếng Anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

 Bingo

- Put the table on the
board.

-Ask students to choose
any five things and copy
them into their books.
- Read out the words in
any order.

-Look at the
board.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Choose any
five things.

- Put ticks next
to the things that
they listen to.

- Shouts

“Bingo”.

Revision:

a can of soda, a bottle of water,
some rice, a glass of orange juice,
some meat, some oranges, some
fish, some vegetables, some
chicken, a bowl of noodles.

 Elicit vocabulary
 Visual
 //
 //
 //

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the
main stress
pattern.

- Write the new
words in their
notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- Fifty : 50.

- a hundred (Two hundred) : 100
(200)

- a thousand(Two thousand):
1000 /

2000

- seven thousand five hundred :
7.500.

 Slap the board

- Put the numbers on the
board.

- Call two students of two
teams to the front of the
class.

- Call out one of
numbers in English in
loud voice.

 Group

works.

- Say the

numbers in
English .

- Run forward
and slap the
correct numbers
on the board.
- Students have
slapped all the
numbers.

 2000
7.500

100
1000
200
 
Presentation text

- Ask students to read a
menu

in A5 on page 120 then
anwer some questions
about prices to isolate the
model sentence:

+ How much is a fried
rice?

+ How much is a cake?
 + How much is a 
sandwich?

- Let students copy the
notes in their notebooks
and memorize.

- Students read
the menu.

- Answer the
questions about
prices to isolate

the model

sentence:

+ It’s 2,500 ñ.

+ It’s 500 ñ.

+ It’s 1,500 ñ.

- Copy the notes
in the notebooks
and memorize.

Target language:

How much is /
are…?

It’s /
they’re

- a fried rice 2,500ñ

- a bowl of noodles 3,000ñ

- a sandwich 1,500ñ

- a cake 500ñ

- an orange juice 1,800ñ

- a lemon juice 1,000ñ

- an ice-cream 2,000ñ

- How much + be + S ?
 - It / they + be + price

- Giá bao nhiêu?

- Hỏi về giá cả.

 Board drill 3. Practice:

</div>
(153)<div class='page_container' data-page=153>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Period 69 : GRAMMAR PRACTICE

I. Aims:

 Further practice in like and dislike, countabilitiy, adjectives, question words,

present Progressive, simple present and quantifiers

II. Objective:

 At the end, students will be able to produce language better.

III. Teaching aids:

 Textbook

IV. Procedure:

</div>
(154)<div class='page_container' data-page=154>

Giáo án tiếng Anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên

Teacher’s activities Students’activities Content on the board

 Dialogue build.

- Read the dialogue and
write few key words on
the board to help students
remember what the two
speaker in the dialogue
say to each other .

- Get students to write in
the missing words on the
board.

- Ask students to write the
missing words on the
board.

-Answer the
teacher’s

question.

- Look at the
board and listen
to the teacher
carefully.

- Reproduce the
dialogue from
the cues.

- Build the
dialogue until it
is memorized.
- Write in the
missing words
on the board.

1.Present simple tense:

 Like

a) - Do you ____ noodles?
 - Yes, I _____ noodles.
 - _____ you _____ rice?
 - No, ____ ____ ____ rice.
 b) - ____ she____ chicken?
 - Yes. She ____ chicken.
 - ____ she ____ fish?
 - No. She ____ ____ fish.

 Nought and crosses

- Put the grid on the board.
- Divide class into teams.
One is noughts (O) and
the other is Crosses (X).
- Two teams choose any
words in the boxes and
ask questions about
feelings .

- The team which has
three noughts or three
crosses on a line will win
the game.

- Look at the
board.

- Work in
groups.

- One is noughts
(O) and the other
is Crosses (X).
- Choose any
words in the
boxes, ask and
ask questions
about feelings :

+Do you have
any bananas?
+No, I don’t
have any bana..

, but I have
some oranges

2.A / an / some / any:

1. any 2. any 
3.ome 4. some 
5. any 6.some 
7. any 8. some 
 9. a

 Pelmanism.

- Stick 10 cards on the
board so that the students
can only see the numbers,
make sure the words are
mixed up.

- Divide the slass into two
teams and ask students to
choose two numbers.
- Go on until the cards are
turned over.

- Look at the
board.

- Listen to the
teacher’s

explanation.
- Work in teams.
- One of student

in each team
chooses any two
numbers.

- Go on until the
cards are turned
over.

3. Adjectives:
1. tall

6. thin
2.weak
7. full
3. hot
8. short
4. fat
9. strong
5.hungry
10 cold

154

</div>
(155)<div class='page_container' data-page=155>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Period 70

Đề ra và đáp án

The second written test ( Time: 45’)
A. Objectives:

 - Check the knowledge which has been learnt to know how well Sts know about the
grammar, vocab, structures, understanding,

 - Sts do the test carefully, exactly,and clearly.

B. New lesson.

 - Hand out the photocopies.

 - Ask Sts to master the test.

Đề a

I.HÃy nghe và điền thông tin nghe đ ợc vào ô trống (2.0 điểm)

1- Lan would like some……….for breakfast.
2- Tuan is thirsty, he would like some …….
3- An ice- cream is ………...dong

4- Hoang doesn’t have breakfast so he is ………...now.

II.T×m 1 từ không cùng nhóm trong các câu sau ( 1.0 ®iÓm )

1. a.banana b.rice c.orange d.apple

2. a.eye b.hair c.orange juice d.nose

3. a.bottle b.banana c.packet d.tube

4. a.full b.thirty c.hungry d.short

III.Hãy chọn 1 đáp án đúng nhất trong các đáp án sau để hoàn thành câu (2 điểm)

1. She has ... lips

A. long B. full C. short D. short

2.I am ... I ‘d like some noodles .

A. thirsty B. full C. tired D. hungry
3. There is... water in the bottle .

A. any B. some C. many D. a

4. She wants ... cooking oil.

A. a box of B. a dozen C. a bottle of D. a bottle
5. How ...eggs do you want ?

A. any B. many C. much D. some

6. Is your mother’s hair long ...short ?

A. and B. between C. with D. or

7. There aren’t ... apples on the table.

A. some B. any C. a D. an

8. ... color is her hair ? _ It is black.

A. How B. What C. When D. Where

IV.Đọc kỹ đoạn văn sau và điền F vào ô trống nếu thông tin sai và T nếu thông tin là
đúng (2.5 điểm)

Milk is a good drink .Fruit juice is also a good drink. Milk and fruit juice are very good for our
health . Children should drink milk and fruit juice every day . They give us a lot of vitamins . Meat
, fish and vegetables are necessary foods . We have meat , fish , vegetables and rice for lunch and
dinner .

1. ______ Fruit juice is a good drink .

2. ______ We also need meat , fish , vegetables .

3. ______ Milk and fruit juice give us a lot of vitamins .
4. ______ Milk and fruit juices are good for children .
5. ______ Milk isn’t a good drink .

V.Sắp xếp các từ xáo trộn sau thành câu hoàn chỉnh (2.5 điểm)

1. Id/ for / like / noodles / some / breakfast

...
2. like / milk / I / would / some

...
3. Lan’s / is/ round / face

...
4.would / like / you / what / lunch / for ?

...
5. white / Mai/ / teeth / has.

...

</div>
(156)<div class='page_container' data-page=156>

Đề b

I.HÃy nghe và điền thông tin nghe đ ợc vào ô trống (2.0 điểm)

1- Tuan is thirsty, he would like some ………...

2- Hoang doesn’t have breakfast so he is ………....now.
3- An ice- cream is ………...dong

4- Lan would like some...for breakfast.

II.Tìm 1 từ không cùng nhóm trong các câu sau ( 1.0 điểm )

1. a.ice-cream b.hair c.eye d.nose

2. a.hungry b.thirty c.cold d.full

3. a.rice b.chicken c.orange d.water

4. a.banana b.rice c.orange d.apple

III.Hãy chọn 1 đáp án đúng nhất trong các đáp án sau để hoàn thành câu (2 điểm)

1. ... color is her hair ? _ It is black.

A. How B. When C. What D. Where

2. She has ... lips

A. long B. full_ C. short D. heavy

3. Is your mother ‘s hair long ...short ?

A. and B. or C. with D. between

4.I am ... I ‘d like some noodles .

A. thirsty B. hungry C. tired D. full
5. There aren’t ... apples on the table.

A. any B. some C. a D. an

6. There is... water in the bottle .

A. any B. some C. many D. a

7. She wants ... cooking oil.

A. a box of B. a dozen C. a bottle of D. a bottle
8. How ...eggs do you want ?

A. any B. much C. many D. some

IV.Đọc kỹ đoạn văn sau và điền F vào ô trống nếu thông tin sai và T nếu thông tin là
đúng (2.5 điểm)

1. ______ Milk is a good drink .

2. ______ Fruit juice isn’t a good drink .

3. ______ Milk and fruit juices are good for children .
4. ______ We also need meat , fish , vegetables .

5. ______ Milk and fruit juice give us a lot of vitamins .

V.Sắp xếp các từ xáo trộn sau thành câu hoàn chỉnh (2.5 điểm)

1. white / She / / teeth / has.

...
2. Nga’s / is/ round / face

...
3. like / milk / I / would / some

...
4.would / like / you / what / breakfast / for ?

...
5. I’d/ for / like / noodles / some / breakfast.

...
* Rót kinh nghiƯm

</div>
(157)<div class='page_container' data-page=157>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Nm hc 2009 -2010

Period 72

Chữa bài kiểm tra

Preparing date: …/ 03/2009
Checking date: …./03/2009

1. Ma trËn:

Néi dung NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiĨu VËn dơng Tỉng sè:

KQ TL KQ TL KQ TL

I. Listening 4

0,5

2,0

II. Reading 5

0,5 5 2,5

III. Language focus 8

0,25 4 0,25 12 3,0

IV. Writing 5

0,5 5 2,5

Tæng sè: 8

2,0 4 2,0 5 2,5 9 3,5 26 10

2-KÕt qu¶:

Líp/sÜ sè 0 -<2.0 2.0 -<5.0 5.0 -<6.5 6.5 -<8.0 8.0 – 10.0

SL % SL % SL % SL % SL %

6A/42/42 4 10.0 11 26.0 19 45.0 8 19.0

6B/39/39 18 46.0 13 33.0 8 21.0 0 0

6C/37/38 1 3.0 15 41.0 15 41.0 6 16.0 0 0

118 1 1.0 37 31.0 39 33.0 33 28.0 8 7.0

3- Nhận xét

*Ưu điểm:

Học sinh làm bài kiểm tra nghiêm túc, có chất lỵng.

 Học sinh hiểu và vận dụng đợc những kiến thức đã học vào bài kiểm tra, có nhiều em làm
bài có chất lợng cao nh:

Phạm Thị Hoà(6a)
Trần Thị Hồng(6a)
Võ Thị Tâm(6a)

Nhiu em bám sát vào kiến thức đã đợc học và đợc củng cố để làm bài có kết quả cao

*Nh

ợc điểm:

Bờn cnh nhng em t im cao, vẫn cịn một số em khơng biết vận dụng kiến thức đã học
vào việc làm bài kiểm tra, nhiều em không ôn tập cẩn thận ở nhà dẫn đến cht lng bi kim tra
thp nh:

Phạm Trung Kiên(6c)
Nguyễn Hữu Tý(6c)

*Những lỗi th ờng gặp

T vng khụng thuc do đó khi viết thờng mắc lỗi chính tả

 Cha linh hoạt trong khi đọc hiểu

*BiƯn ph¸p:

Tăng cờng chú trọng hơn nữa đối với đối tợng học sinh yếu trong các tiết dạy cũng nh trong các
buổi phụ đạo

</div>
(158)<div class='page_container' data-page=158>

Yêu cầu các học sinh có kết quả tốt kèm cặp giúp đỡ các học sinh có kết quả thấp nhằm góp phần đa
chất lợng của bài kiểm số 2 cú kt qu cao hn.

Động viên các em chú ý hơn trong việc tiếp thu bài trên lớp cũng nh học bài , chuẩn bị bài ở nhà
* Rút kinh nghiÖm

...
...
...

Period 72

UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PAST TIMES
Lesson 1: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? (A1,5)

Date of preparing: 09/3/2009
Date of teaching:10/3/2009

I. Aims:

 Further practice in present progressive and sports vocabulary to talk about what people are

doing .

II. Objective:

 At the end, students might express what people are doing fluently.

III. Teaching aids:

 Pictures and poster.

</div>
(159)<div class='page_container' data-page=159>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content

 Hangman

- Draw strokes on the board.
Each stroke stands for a letter
of the word.

- The teacher draws a stroke
if a student’s guess is not
right.

- The teacher gives the
answer if they lose.

- Students take turn to guess
the letters of the words.
- Give a letter in the
alphabet.

- Have to try to guess the
word.

- Find out the word.

Revision:

_ _ _ _ _ _ (sports)

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (pastimes)

 Elicit vocabulary

- Use pictures to introduce
new words .

- Have some students say the
names of activities the
teacher show.

- Listen and look at the
pictures shown by the
teacher.

- Try to say the names of
activities shown.

- Write the new words in
their notebooks.

1 -Vocabulary

- to swim : bơi, lội

- to play badminton : chơi
cầu lông

- to jog : đi bộ thể dục
- to do aerobics : tập thể
dục nhịp điệu

- to play table tennis : chơi
bóng bàn

- to skip : nhảy dây

 Rub out and remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat chorally
and remember all the
English words.

- Call the English words and
write the English words if
there is time.

 Checking
vocabulary:

- Try to help students to
review the tenses : present
simple and present
progressive.

- Students remind the
tenses : present simple and
present progressive.

2 .Presentation:

- He is swimmimg.
 - They are playing 
badminton.

- She is skipping.

 Word cue drill

- Run through the cues.
- Hold up the first cues and
say the model sentences.

- What is he doing?
- He is swimming.

- Do the same for the second
cue.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the cues.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat it chorally and then
individually.

- Make the sentence for
themselves.

- Practice in pairs.

- Some pairs practice in
front.

3. Practice:

- He / swim

- She / do aerobics
- They / play tennis
- They / play soccer
- He / jog

- She / skip

 Nought and crosses

- Put the grid on the board.
- Divide class into teams. One
is noughts (O) and the other
is Crosses (X).

- Two teams choose any
words in the boxes and ask
questions about activities .
- The team which has three
noughts or three crosses on a
line will win the game.

- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.

- One is noughts (O) and the
other is Crosses (X).

- Choose any words in the
boxes, ask and ask
questions about prices :

+Picture c

+What are they doing?
+ They are playing soccer.

4.Further practice:

159

Picture i Picturea Picture b

Picture g Pictureh Picture c

</div>
(160)<div class='page_container' data-page=160>

* Rót kinh nghiƯm

...
...
...

Period 73

UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES
Lesson 2: FREE TIME (B1-3)

Date of preparing: 12/3/2009
Date of teaching:13/3/2009

I-Aims:

 Writing short texts about what we do in our free time.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students might wirte short texts better.

III. Teaching aids:

 Textbook.

</div>
(161)<div class='page_container' data-page=161>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Contenton the board
Guessing game.

- Show them the picture. Ask
them to choose one of
activities.

- Get the rest of the class to
guess which activity they
choose. The first student
guesses the house correctly
comes up to the front, chooses
a new house and the game
continues.

- Students look at the
picture and choose one of
the activities the teacher
shows .

- The rest of the class asks
him or her question to find
which activity he or she
chooses.

* Do you go joging in your
free time?

* Yes, I do / No, I don’t.

- swim
 - go joging
 - play volleyball 
 - do aerobics
 - skip

Open prediction

- Introduce the two chracters
Lan and Nam, ask students to
predict which sports Lan and
Nam do.

- Listen to the teacher.
- Guess which sports they
do.

1- Vocabulary:

- Free time : thời gian
rãnh.

- to go fishing : ñi câu
cá.

- to go to the movies : ñi
xem phim.

Rub out and remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat chorally
and remember all the
English words.

- Call the English words and
write the English words if
there is time.

* Checking vocabulary:

- Ask students to read the text
about Lan and Nam.

- Ask students to read then
answer the questions below.
- Check whether their answer
are right or wrong.

- Students read the text and
check their predictions.

- Read the text again and
answer the questions below.
- Write the questions and
answers in the notebook.

2 .While writing:

B1 on page 127

a) Phuong goes to the
movies in his …

b) Ly watches TV.

c) Nam reads in his free
time.

d) Lan listens to music.
 e) Tuan goes fishing.
 f) Long plays video games

Pyramid

- Ask students to work in
groups. Each student writes
three things about they do in
their free time.

- Let each group read “ Group
writng” aloud.

- Feedback.

- Work in groups.

- Each student write three
things about they do in their
free time.

- Read aoud.

3-.Post reading:

-San writes: I watch TV, go 
fishing…

-Thuy writes: I watch TV,go 
to the park

* Group writing: San, Thuy 
and Chinh watch TV. San 
and Chinh play football. San
goes fishing. Thuy goes to 
the park and play

badminton…………

- Ask students to learn by
heart sports vocabulary and
Simple present tense.

- Have them prepare Unit 12
- Lesson 4: (B4-5) : “How
often” questions and

- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher
requests.

4-.Homework:

- Sports vocabulary.

- Simple present tense.

- Unit 12: Sparts And 
Pastimes – FREE TIME -
Lesson 4 : (B4-5)

</div>
(162)<div class='page_container' data-page=162>

*Rót kinh nghiÖm

...
...
...

Period 74

UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES
Lesson 3: FREE TIME (B4-5)

Date of preparing: 16/3/2009
Date of teaching:17/3/2009

I. Aims:

 “How often” questions and answers “ 0nce, twice, three times ………… a week” to talk
about frequency activities .

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “ How often..?”.

III. Teaching aids:

 Textbook and cassette.

IV. Procedure:

Matching

- Set the sence: What do you do in your free time
?Now listen to the tape about What Tan/ Minh and
 Nam/ Lien /Lan and Mai do in their free time.

- Run through the pictures.

- Get students to match the names with the right pictures.

Elicit vocabulary

 Situation
 Visual
 Situation
 Visual
 Situation

 What and where

- Elicit the vocabulary from the students and write them in the circles.

</div>
(163)<div class='page_container' data-page=163>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

 Ordering

- Write a dialogue which is in wrong orders on the board.

- Get students to listen to the tape then put the statements in the correct orders.
- Get students to isolate the model sentences.

- Let students copy the notes in their notebooks and memorize.

 Substitution drill

- Get students to repeat the numbers (three, one, two……).

- Three

 Picture drill

- Run through the pictures.

- Hold up the first picture and say the model sentences:
+How often does Ly watch TV?

+ She watches TV twice a week.
- Do the same for the seccond picture.
- Correct their mistakes.

</div>
(164)<div class='page_container' data-page=164>

 Find someone who
- Put the table on the board.
- Get students to get into groups.

- Get students to ask each other questions.
+ Teacher: How often do you play football?
+ Student (Nam): 3 times.

- Correct if there are any mistakes.
- Feedback.

- Ask students to learn adverbs of frequency.

- Have them do exercise B1-5 in the exercise book and prepare Unit 12 – L5- C1– C4: Reading and practising adverds of frequency with the simple present t

...

ense.

*Rót kinh nghiƯm

...
...
...

Period 76

UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES
Lesson 4: HOW OFTEN ? (C1-4)

Date of preparing: 19/3/2009
Date of teaching:20/3/2009

</div>
(165)<div class='page_container' data-page=165>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

 Help students understand the details and practice adverbs of frequency with the simple
present tense.

II. Objective:

 By the end of the lesson, students can understand details and use adverbs of frequency
correctly.

III. Teaching aids:

 Poster and textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board
Nought and crosses

- Put the grid on the board.
- Divide class into teams.
One is noughts (O) and the
other is Crosses (X).
- Two teams choose any
words in the boxes and ask
questions about activities .
- The team which has three
noughts or three crosses on a
line will win the game.

- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.

- One is noughts (O) and
the other is Crosses (X).
- Choose any words in
the boxes, ask and ask
questions about activities
:

+read books.

+How often do you read 
books?

+Twice a week.

swim booksread tennisplay
go to

school soccerplay homeworkdo
watch tv listen tomusic

play
badminto

n

 Elicit vocabulary
- Use signs to introduce new
words : VVVV – VVV –
VV – V – X.

- Listen to teacher .
- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the Vietnamese
translation.

- Copy in their notebook.

1-Vocabulary:

- Always (adv) : luôn luôn.
- Usually (adv) : thường thường.
- Often (adv) : thường.

- Sometimes (adv) : thỉnh thoảng.
- Never (adv) : không bao giờ

 Slap the board

- Put the signs on the board.
- Call two students of two
teams to the front of the
class.

- Call out one of adverbs in
English in loud voice.

 Group works.

- Say the signs in
English .

- Run forward and slap
the correct signss on the
board.

- Students have slapped
all the numbers.

VVV 
VVVV

VV
V
X

 Guessing meaning

- Ask students to use the
pictures and read the text to
match the Vietnamese with
the new vocabulary in
context.

 Grid

- Put the table on the board.
- Get students to reread the
text then complete the table.
- Get students to share the
answers with their partners.
- Feed back

 Answer given
- Ask students to ask
questions and answer:
+ How often do they go to
the zoo?

+ They sometimes go to
the zoo.

- Students read the text
and use the pictures to
match the Vietnamese
with the new vobulary.
- Read the table on the
board.

- Read the text again and
complete the table.
- Share their answer with
their partners.

- Ask and answer the
questions..

2-While reading:

1. tha dieu = fly a kite.
 2. cai lieu = a tent
 3. di cam trai = go camping
 4. di da ngoai = have a picnic.

How

often nev som oft usu al

zoo V
park V
picnic V
sports V
camp V
school V
homewo V

</div>
(166)<div class='page_container' data-page=166>

kite V

 Writing

- Have students write about
activities in their free time
using adverbs of frequency:

always, usually, often,

sometimes, never .

- Write about activities in
their free time.

- Write individually and
then share with their
partners.

3 -Post reading:

I often go to the zoo. I never………

………

………
 ………
 ………
- Ask students to learn by

heart advebs of frequency
and “How often

………?”.
- Have them prepare Unit 12
- Lesson 6: (C5-6) :

Reading and further practice
in Vs/adv.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the teacher
requests.

4-.Homework:

- Adverbs of frequency.

- How often ………?
 I always / usually / often / smetimes..

- Unit 12: Sparts And Pastimes –

HOW OFTEN? - Lesson 6 : (C5-6)

*Rót kinh nghiƯm

...
...
...

Period 77

UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES
Lesson 5: HOW OFTEN ? (C5-6)

Date of preparing: 19/3/2009
Date of teaching:20/3/2009

I. Aims:

 Present a short reading to understand the details and get further practice in Simple Present
tense, adverbs of frequency and vocabulary.

II. Objective:

 At the end, students can understand the text and use adverbs of frequency more fluently.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cassette and textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

 Prediction
- Explain the listening
exercise and introduce
the content of this
exercise.

- Let them listen to the
cassette and match the
adverbs with appropriate
pictures as requested.
- Let them listen again to
correct their exercise.

- Listen to the teacher’s
planation and introduce.
- Listen to the cassette
and do the exercise.
- Listen again and check
the answer.

a) - never
 b) - sometimes
 c) - often
 d) - often

e) - usually

 Elicit vocabulary
Situation

Visual
Explanation

- Listen to teacher .
- Repeat after the teacher.
- Notice the Vietnamese
translation.

- Copy in their notebook.

1-Vocabulary:

- to wear clothes / boots : mặc quần
aùo / mang giaày .

- a stove : lò, bếp.
- overnight : qua đêm.

 Rub out and

</div>
(167)<div class='page_container' data-page=167>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

English words.

- Call the English words
and write the English
words if there is time.

 Brainstorm

 Set up the sence:

What do Minh and his 
friends do on the 
weekend?

- Ask students to think of
town and the country.
- Get them to go to the
board and write down
their ideas.

- Give feedback.

- Students to think of the
town and country.

- Go to the board and
write down their idea.

ride a bike

have a picnic fly a kite
playgame

Pastimes in the country
 go to the

mountain go camping

go to the river

- Get students to read the
text and check.

 Lucky numbers
- Write the numbers on
the board.

- Divide class into teams.
The teams take turn to

choose the numbers.
- Tell students that they
have to answer the
questions .

- Read the text and
check.

- Look at the board.
- Work in teams.

- Take turn to choose the
numbers.

- Listen to the teacher
carefully.

- Answer the questions.

2.While reading:

- go walkingin the mountains

- wear strong boots, warm clothes.
 - take food, water and camping stoves
 - camp overnight.

Reading comprehension

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10

1 - b What do they always wear?.

3 - f What do they take?

5 - c When does he go?

6 - a What does Minh like doing?

8 - e Where does he often go?

10 - d Who does he usually go with?

2 – 4 – 7 – 9 : Lucky numbers

 Transformation
writing

- Have students rewrite
the text by changing
“Minh…to … I...

- Write the text again by
changing “ Minh to I” “ ”.
- Write individually and
then share with their
partners.

3-.Post reading:

C6 , page 132

I like walking. On the weekend, I………

………
………

- Ask students to learn by
heart advebs of

frequency and Simple
present tense.

- Have them prepare
Unit 13 - Lesson 1:

(A1) : Seasons

vocabulary with weather“

like ”

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the teacher
requests.

4-.Homework:

- Adverbs of frequency and vocab.
- Simple present tense.

- Unit 13: Activities And The Season –

THE WEATHER AND SEASONS - Lesson

1 : (A1)

*Rót kinh nghiƯm

...
...
...

Period 78

UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS

Lesson 1: THE WEATHER AND SEASONS (A 1-2)

Date of preparing: 20/3/2009

Date of teaching: 21/3/2009

I. Aims:

 Help students know seasons vocabulary with “What’s the weather like…….”.

II. Objective:

</div>
(168)<div class='page_container' data-page=168>

 Students can talk about the seasons and the weather.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cassette and textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on tha board

 Jumbled words

-Write numbers whose
letters are in disorder.
- Divide the class into two
teams.

- Ask students from each
team to go to the board and
write the correct words .

-Look at the board.

- Listen to the teacher.
- Work in teams.

- Go to the board and write
the correct words. (One
word, one student).

- oht = hot
- codl = cold
- like = like
- whta = what

 Elicit vocabulary

 Situation
 picture
 Situation
 Visual
 Situation
 Explanation
 Situation
 //

- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.
- Notice the main stress
pattern.

- Write the new words in
their notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- The spring : mùa xuân.
- The summer: mùa hạ
- The fall : mùa thu.
- The winter : mùa đông.
- The seasons : mùa.
- The weather : thời tiết
- Warm (adj) : ấm áp.
- Cool (adj) : mát mẻ.

 Ordering

- Write new words which
are in wrong orders on the
board.

- Get students to listen to
the tape then put the
statements in the correct
orders by numbering.

- Students new words
which are in wrong order.
- Listen to the tape then
number them.

The winter/ the fal/. cool
/ warm/. seasons /. the spring

/. the weather / the summer

 Presentation text

- ask students to read the
sentences in A1 on page
134 to isolate the model
senetences:

+ What’s the weather like 
in the summer?

- Read the sentences to
isolate the model
sentences:

+ it’s hot in the summer.

- Copy the notes in the
notebooks and memorize.

2- Model sentences

- What’s the weather like in the 
 summer?

- It’s hot

- What’s the weather like ……?
 - It’s ………. . .

- Thời tiết ………ra sao?.
 - Hỏi về thời tiết. .

 Word cue drill

- Run through the cues.
- Hold up the first cues and
say the model sentences.

- What’s the weather like in
the summer?

- It’s hot in the summer.

- Do the same for the
second cue.

- Look at the cues.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat it chorally and
then individually.

- Make the sentence for
themselves.

- Practice in pairs.

3. Practice:

- hot / summer

- cold / winter

</div>
(169)<div class='page_container' data-page=169>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

- Correct their mistakes. - Some pairs practice in

front. - cool / fall

 Substitution Boxes

- Put students into four
groups ( one for each
eason) an each group
makes a poster.

- Example:
- In the spring

+The afternoon is
warm but the evening is
cool.

+ The rice is green.
 + The trees are
beautiful.

- Students work in four
groups. Each group makes
a poster.

- Listen to the teacher.
- In the spring.
 The ………
 - In the summer.
 The ………
 - In the fall.
 The………

4. Further practice:

rice hot and moutain
 green river the night
 morning warm yellow is
 beautiful cold evening
 cool trees blue
weather

gray hot flowers
 afternoon house tall very

- Ask students to learn
seasons vocabulary and
how to talk about the
weather.

- Have them prepare Unit

13 -- L5- A3: Talking
about what weather you
like.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the teacher
suggests.

5.Homework:

- Seasons vocabulary.

- What’s the weather like ?
It’s...

- Unit 13: Activities And The 
Seasons – THE WEATHER AND 
SEASONS - Lesson 2 : A3

*Rót kinh nghiƯm

...
...
...

Period 79

UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS
Lesson 2: THE WEATHER AND SEASONS (A3)

Date of preparing: 23/3/2009
Date of teaching: 24/3/2009

I. Aims:

 Present “ What weather do you like?” to talk about your favorite weather.

II. Objective:

 Students can talk about their favorite weather.

III. Teaching aids:

 Poster and textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

 Bingo

- Write 10 words about the
weather on the board.

-Ask students to choose any

- Read the words on
the board.

- Choose any four
words.

Summer , cool, winter, cold, fall
 Warm . spring, hot, weather, season

</div>
(170)<div class='page_container' data-page=170>

five words and copy them into
their notebooks.

- Read any words.

- Listen to the teacher
and

put ticks next to the
words that they listen
to.

- Shouts “Bingo”.

 Predict dialogue

- Set the scene:

Lan asks Mai about Mai’s
favorite weather.

+ What is your favorite
weather?

- Put the dialogue on the
board. Some of the words are
missing.

- Ask students to guess what
the missing words are.

- Listen to the teacher.
-Answer the teacher’s
questoins.

- Read the dialogue.
- Guess what the
missing words are.
- Students give their
prediction.

1- Dialogue build

Lan: What’s the weather like today?

Mai: It’s (1) ___ .

Lan: Do you like (2) ____ weather?

Mai: No, I don’t .

Lan: What weather do you like ?

Mai: I like (3)______ weather.
 -What weather +do /does+S+ like?
 - S + like / likes +…………+ weather.

- ……… thích thời tiết nào?
 - Hỏi thời tiết được ưa thích .

 Picture drill

- Run through the pictures.
- Hold up the first picture and
say the model sentences:

+What weather do you like?
+ I like hot weather.

- Do the same for the seccond
picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.

- Repeat it chorally
and then individually.
- Make the sentence
for themselves.

- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs practice
in front.

2. Practice:

- A3 on page 135:

- I / hot
- we / cold
- She / cool
- They / warm

 Mapped dialogue

- Put the dialogue on the
board which is only words.
The words are cues.

- Model the dialogue.

- Run through the cues like a
drill with the whole class.

- Look at the board

and listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Practice the dialogue
in pair .

- Some pairs practice
in front.

- Rewrite the dialogue
.

3-.Further practice:
 Tra Vinh

 Ha noi 

-What / HN ?
- hot

- cold

-What / like ?
- Come / TV

cold …………TV?
What / like?

Come / HN !
hot.

- Ask students to learn
seasons vocabulary and how
to talk about their favorite
weather.

- Have them prepare Unit 13
– L3- A4-5: “When” and
“WH”questions.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the teacher
suggests.

4-Homework:

- Seasons vocabulary.

-What weather +do /does+S+ like?
 - S + like / likes +…………+ weather.

</div>
(171)<div class='page_container' data-page=171>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

*Rót kinh nghiÖm

...

...
...

Period 80

UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS
Lesson 3: THE WEATHER AND SEASONS (A4-5)

Date of preparing: 26/3/2009
Date of teaching: 27/3/2009

I. Aims:

 Help students know “ When” clauses in positive staemanets and “WH” questions.

II. Objective:

 Students can use “When” clause and “Wh” questions fluently.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cards and textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

 Brainstorm

- Set up the sence: What do Minh 
and his friends do on the

weekend?

- Ask students to think of town
and the country.

- Get them to go to the board and
write down their ideas.

- Give feedback.

- Students to think of the
town and country.

- Go to the board and write
down their idea.

listen to music

go for a walk 
fly a kite

watch TV 
 play badmint

go swimming
 play video games

 Predict

- Set the scene: You are going to
read a short passage about Ba.
Guess what Ba does in different
weather. (hot, cold, cool and
warm)

- Let students read the text
themselves.

- Ask some students some
questions and let them answer
loudly.

- Point to the questions and get
students to isolate the model
sentences .

- Listen to the teacher.
- Guess what Ba does in
different weather.

- Students give their
predictions.

- Read the text.

-Answer the teacher’s
questoins.

- Give the form, meaning
and use.

2.Prediction

a. hot ?
b. cold ?
c. cool
d. warm ?

3. Model sentences

What+do/does+S+ do+ when
it’s….?

When it’s…, S + V………..

- …………làm gì khi thời
tiết………?

- Hỏi ai làm gì vào thơìø tiết
nào đó .

Word cue drill

- Run through the cues.

- Hold up the first cues and say
the model sentences.

- What do you do when it’s 
 cold?

- I go jogging when it’s cold.

- Look at the cues.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat it chorally and
then individually.

- Make the sentence for
themselves.

4. Practice:

- cold / go jogging

- cool / do aerobics

- hot / go swimming

</div>
(172)<div class='page_container' data-page=172>

- Do the same for the second cue.

- Correct their mistakes. - Practice in pairs.- Some pairs practice in

front.

- warm / go to the park

Transformation writing

- Get students to change the text
about Ba and write about
themselves.

- Get students to swrap books,
read their partners’ texts, then
write about What their partners do
in different weather.

- Students change the text
about Ba and write about
themselves.

- Swrap books, read their
partners’ texts, then write
about What their partners
do in different weather.

5. Further practice:

 A4, page 136
 a. When it’s hot, I …………
 When it’s hot, I ………

When it’s hot, I ………
 When it’s hot, I ………
 b. When it’s hot, he / she …
 When it’s hot, he / she … 
 When it’s hot, he / she … 
 When it’s hot, he / she …

- Ask students to learn seasons
vocabulary and how to talk about
their favorite activities in
different weather.

- Have them prepare Unit 13 –
L4- B1: Adverbs of frequency,
Presnt simple……….

- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher
suggests.

*.Homework:

- Seasons vocabulary.
-What +do /does+S+do+
when it’s…?

- When it’s ………, S +
V……….

- Unit 13: Activities And

The Seasons – ACTIVITIES 
IN SEASONS - Lesson 4: B1

*Rót kinh nghiÖm

...
...
...

Period 81

UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS
Lesson 4: ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS (B1)

Date of preparing: 27/3/2009
Date of teaching: 28/3/2009

I. Aims:

 Further practice in adverds of frequency, simple present tense and sports

vocabulary.

II. Objective:

 At the end,students might use grammar points better.

III. Teaching aids:

 Textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board
Matching

- Write adverbs of
frequency and signs on
the board.

- Get students to come up
to the board then match
items in the left with

- Look at the board.
- Work in teams
- Come up to the
board then match
items in the left with

</div>
(173)<div class='page_container' data-page=173>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

items in the rihgt. items in the right.

Elicit vocabulary

- use picture b and e to

present new words. - Look at the pictureand say the words in
English.

1- Vocabulary:

- to play basketball: chơi bóng chuyền
- to go sailing: đi bơi thuyền.

Presentation pictures

- Show the picture and ask
students :

+ What do they do in
the in the spring?

- Let students copy the
notes in their notebooks
and memorize.

- Answer the
teacher’s question
+ They often play
volleyball in the

spring.

- copy the notes in
the notebooks and
memorize.

2-Model sentences

-What do you do in the spring?
 -They often play volleyball in the 
 spring.

-What+do /does+S+ do+ in + ….?
 - S + Adverbs + V + ……….

- ………làm gì vào………?
 - Hỏi ai làm gì vào mùa nào đó .

Answer given

- Put the sentences on the
board.

- Get students to ask
questions and answer.
+What do you do in the
fall?

+ We often go fishing.

- Do the same for the
second cue.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Read the sentences.
- Listen to the
teacher.

- Repeat it chorally

and then

individually.

- Make the
questions .

- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs practice
in front.

3. Practice:

- We often go fishing in the fall.

- They usually play volleyball in the
winter.

- She sometimes flies a kite in spring.
- He never reads books in summer.

Lucky numbers

- Write the numbers on
the board.

- Divide class into teams.
The teams take turn to
choose the numbers.
- Tell students that they
have to answer the
questions .

- Look at the board.
- Work in teams.
- Take turn to choose
the numbers.

- Listen to the
teacher carefully.
- Answer the
questions.

4. Further practice:

1 2 3 4 5
6

7 8 9 10 
11 12

1.What ‘s the weather like in the winter?
2.What do you usually do in the fall?

3.What do you usually eat in the winter?

5.What’s the weather like in the spring?
7.Where do you usually do in the sum…?
10.What’s the weather like in the fall?

Lucky numbers :4 - 6 - 8 - 9 - 11 - 12 :

- Ask students to learn
seasons vocabulary and
how to talk about they
often do in seasons.

- Have them prepare Unit
13 L5-B2:Writing about
activities you do in
different seasons.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the teacher
suggests.

5.Homework:

- Seasons vocabulary.

-What +do /does+S+do+ in ………?
 - S + always / usually / often………

- Unit 13: Activities And The Seasons –

ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS - Lesson 5: B2

</div>
(174)<div class='page_container' data-page=174>

*Rót kinh nghiƯm

...
...
...

Period 82

UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS
Lesson 5: ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS (B2)

Date of preparing: 30/3/2009

Date of teaching: 31/3/2009

I. Aims:

 Writing about activities you do in different seasons.

II. Objective:

 At the end,students might write their activities in different seasons.

III. Teaching aids:

 Textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board
Networks

- Write a network on the
board and put some more
words below it.

- Get students to think of
activities they do in
seasons.

- Get students to put the
given words in the
appropriate circles

- Give feedback.

- Students to think of the
town and country.

- Go to the board and fill in
the remaining empty circles
with their own words.

Watch TV go
fishing

read books Seasons

winter summer
 go jogging

do earobics have a
picnic

Survey

- Have them tell about
themselves and talk to their
friends about their
activities.

- Let them practice with
their partners:

+ Which season do you
like?

+ Fall.

+ What’s the weather like
in the fall?

+ It’s cool.

+ Where do you usually
go?

+ to the mountain

- Try to tell about their activities and ask their friends about theirs.
- Practice with partners.

- Tell the teacher what they have asked their partner, e.g.“Hoai
swims. She plays volleyball and table tennis………”

2.Pre writing:

Name Sea- son Wea-ther Usual-lygo Usaul-ly do Usual-ly eat /drink

Hoa

</div>
(175)<div class='page_container' data-page=175>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

+ What do you usually do
there?

+ I go camoing with my
friends

+ What do you usually eat
or drink?

+ We usually take a picnic
and a lot of hot drink.

- Feedback.

Write it up

- Ask Students to write
about the friends they have
interviewed using 3rd person
singular.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Students write about the

friends they have

interviewed using 3rd person
singular.

- Write individually.

3. While writing:

Hoai like the fall when the 
weather is cool. She usually go 
campingin the mountain with 
their friends. They take a picnic 
and a lot of hot drink.

- Correct their writings.
- Choose some writing and
correct on the board.

- Share their writings.
- Write some on the board.

4. Post writing:

- Ask students to write their
activities in their notebook.
- Have them do exercises
in the workbook from page
106 to 111 prepare Unit 14
– L1- A1-3: “Going to”
future.

- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.

5.Homework:

- Writing.

- Exercises in the workbook
from page 106 to 111.

- Unit 14: Making Plans –

VACATION DESTINATIONS -
Lesson 1: A1 - 3

*Rót kinh nghiÖm

...
...
...

Period 83

UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS

Lesson 1: VACATION DESTINATIONS (A1-3)

Date of preparing: 02/4/2009
Date of teaching: 03/4/2009

I. Aims:

 “Going to” future, positive statements and “Wh” questions to talk about vacation

plans.

II. Objective:

 At the end,students might use “Going to” to talk about vacation plans.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cassette and Textbook.

IV. Procedure:

</div>
(176)<div class='page_container' data-page=176>

Chatting

- Ask students some questions
about their activities in seasons.
- Teacher – whole class.

- Answer the teacher’s
questions about their
activities.

- Students – Teacher.

- What do you do in the

spring?

- Do you usually go
camping?

- Where do you often go ?

Elicit vocabulary

 Translation
 Picture
 Translation
 Situation
 Situation
 Translation

- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.
- Notice the main stress
pattern.

- Write the new words in their
notebooks.

1- Vocabulary:

- The summer vacation: kì
nghỉ hè

- The citadel: thành nội.

- to stay with someone: ở với
ai………

- Uncle: chuù, bác.
- Aunt: cô, dì.

- to visit: thăm viếng.

 Rub out and remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out English
words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat chorally and
remember all the English
words.

- Call the English words and
write the English words if
there is time.

 Checking vocabulary:

 Presentation dialogue

- Show students the dialogue.
- Let them listen to the tape.
- Ask them to play the roles of
Ba and Lan.

- Ask students to isolate the
model sentence by Asking them
some questions;

+ What is Ba going to do this
summer vacation?

+ I am going to visit Hue.
 + Where is he going to stay?
 + He is going to stay with his
aunt nad uncle.

- Students read the dialogue
in A2 on page 116 again .
- Make the questions to
isolate the model sentence:
-How muchbeef do you 
want?

-How many eggs do you
want?

 A1 on page 140

+ What is Ba going to do

this summer vacation?

+ I am going to visit Hue.
 + Where is he going to stay?
 + He is going to stay with 
his aunt nad uncle.

Form:

- Wh + be + S + going to + 
V…………?

- S + be + going to + V 
………

- Be going to : sẽ.
 - Diễn tả một dự định.

 Answer given

- Put the sentences on the
board.

- Get students to ask questions
and answer.

+What are you going to do ?
 + I am going to visit Hue.

- Do the same for the second

cue.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Read the sentences.
- Listen to the teacher.

- Repeat it chorally and then
individually.

- Make the questions .
- Practice in pairs.

- Some pairs practice in front.

2. Practice:

- I am going to visit Hue.

- I am going to stay with
my aunt

and uncle.

- I am goig to stay there for
a week.

</div>
(177)<div class='page_container' data-page=177>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

 Mapped dialogue

- Put the dialogue on the board
which is only words. The words
are cues.

- Model the dialogue.

- Run through the cues like a
drill with the whole class.

- Look at the board and listen
to the teacher.

- Repeat after the teacher.
- Practice the dialogue in
pair .

- Some pairs practice in front.
- Rewrite the dialogue .

3-Further practice:
 Lan

 Mai 

-What /
S.Vac?
- Where /

stay?

- How long?
-What / do ?
- HCM city.

Ha Long
Bay.

a hotel.
2 weeks.

Visit /
beach /
swim. And
you?

- Ask students to learn
vocabulary and how to talk
about vacation plans.

- Have them prepare Unit 14
L2-A4-5:Reading a text and
sequencing words: first, then,
next, after that and finally.

- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.

4-.Homework:

- Vocabulary.

+Wh + be + S + going to + 
V…………?

S + be + going to + V 
………

- Unit 14: Making Plans –

VACATION DESTINATIONS 
-Lesson 2: A 4 - 5

*Rót kinh nghiƯm

...
...
...

Period 84

UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS

Lesson 2: VACATION DESTINATIONS (A4-5)

Date of preparing: 03/4/2009
Date of teaching: 04/4/2009

I. Aims:

 Reading a text about vacation plans to understand the details and practice “ going

to” future and sequencing words: first, then, next, after that and finally.

II. Objective:

 At the end, students can understand the text and use sequencing words.

III. Teaching aids:

 Textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board
Chatting

- Ask students some
questions about their
activities in seasons.

- Teacher – whole class.

- Answer the teacher’s
questions about their

activities.

- Students – Teacher.

- What’s the weather like?
- What weather do you like?
- What are you going to do this
summer vacation ?

Elicit vocabulary

 Situation
 Visual

- Listen to teacher .

- Repeat after the teacher.
- Notice the Vietnamese

1- Vocabulary:

- The beach : bãi biển
- a temple : đình miếu.
- first (adv) : trước tiên

</div>
(178)<div class='page_container' data-page=178>

 Translation
 //

translation.

- Copy in their notebook. - Then (adv) : kế đó

 Rub out and
remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat chorally
and remember all the
English words.

- Call the English words
and write the English
words if there is time.

 Checking vocabulary:

 Ordering

- Set the sence: Phuong and
Mai are going to visit the
five places. Can you guess
where they are going to visit
fisrt, then , next, after that

and finally?

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Guess where they
are going to visit
fisrt, then , next,
after that and
finally.

- Nha Trang
- HCM city
- Ha Noi
- Ha Long Bay

- Hue

- Get students to read the
text and check.

 Grid

- Put the table on the board.
- Get students to reread the
text then complete the table.
- Get students to share the
answers with their partners.
- Feed back

 Answer given

- Ask students to ask
questions and answer:

+ Where are they goig to
visit?

+ They are going to visit
Ha Long Bay

+ Where are they going to
stay?

+ They are going to stay
their uncle and aunt.

- Read the text and check.

- Read the table on the
board.

- Read the text again and
complete the table.

- Share their answer with
their partners.

- Ask and answer the
questions.

- Work in pairs.

2.While reading:

- First: Ha Long Bay.
 - Then: Ha Noi.
 -Next: Hue

- After that: Nha Trang.
- Finally: Ho Chi Minh City

Place

s Where Howlong What

Ha
Long
with
uncle &
aunt 
2
days
visit
Ha
Long
Bay 
Ha

Noi hotel days3

see
Ngoc

Son
Temple
Hue friendswith days2 see thecitadel
Nha

Trang friend’shouse days3

Go to
Nha
Trang
Beach
HCM
City

grand-parent’
s
one
week
Visit

grand-parent
s
 Transformation
writing

- Have students use the

same grid headings but this

- Fill it with their own
plans for the summer
vacation.

- Write individually and

4.Post reading:

</div>
(179)<div class='page_container' data-page=179>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

time fill it with their own
plans for the summer
vacation.

then share with their
partners.

- Ask students to learn by
heart vocabulary and
Sequencing words.

- Have them prepare Unit
14 - Lesson 3: (B1-4) :
Asking about others’
projects

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the teacher
requests.

5.Homework:

- Vocabulary.
- Sequencing words.

- Unit 14: Making Plans – FREE 
TIME PLANS - Lesson 3 : (B1 - 4)
 *Rót kinh nghiƯm

...
...
...

Period 85

UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS

Lesson 3: FREE TIME PLANS (b1-4)

Date of preparing: …/4/2009

Date of teaching: …/4/2009

I. Aims:

 Further speaking practice with “ Going to” to talk about plans for the near future.

II. Objective:

 At the end, students can practice speaking more fluently using “Going to”.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cassette and textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

 Finding friends
Put a table on the board.
Ask students to work in
groups

Ask them to match the
verbs with the nouns to
make phrases.

+ See my friend.

 Board drill

Get students to use finding
friend as cues to ask
questions and answer.

Look at the board.
Students work in groups
Match the verbs with the
nouns to make phrases.
Work in pairs.

Ask questions and
answer.

H
w

M.
F

S.
M

M
v

B

m M Wk

see v v v v

play v

do v

visit v v

help v v

go v

wal

k v v

+ What are you going to do tomorrow?
+ I’m going to do my homework.

Predict dialogue

 Set the scene:
Lan and Tuan are
talking about their near
future plans

- Put the dialogue on the
board. Some of the words
are missing.

- Ask students to guess
what the missing words
are.

- Listen to the teacher.
-Answer the teacher’s
questoins.

- Read the dialogue.
- Guess what the missing
words are.

- Students give their
predictions.

+ He / She is going to

1- Dialouge Build

Tuan: What are you going to do tonight?

Lan: I’m going to (1) _________ .

Tuan: What are you going to do
tomorrow?

Lan: It’s Sunday. I’m going to (2)_____.
Then we are going to (3)______. What
about you?

Tuan : Tonight, I’m going to (4) _____ .
Tomorrow I’m going to (5)______ .

</div>
(180)<div class='page_container' data-page=180>

+ What is Lan / Tuan
going to do to tonight /
tomorrow?

………

- Get students to read the
dialogue (B1, page 144)
and check.

 Substitution drill
- Explain how to do the
exercises.

- Let them practice in
pairs.

- Call some pairs to check
and correct their mistakes.
Mapped dialogue

- Put the dialogue on the
board which is only words.
The words are cues.

- Model the dialogue.
- Run through the cues

like a drill with the whole
class.

- Read the dialogue and
check.

- Lis ten to the teacher.
- Practice with partners.
- Correct the exercises
and write in the
notebooks.

- Look at the board and
listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Practice the dialogue in
pair .

- Some pairs practice in
front.

- Rewrite the dialogue if
there is time .

2- Practice

Lan: Tonight- do homework.
Tomorrow- visit-see a movie.

Tuan: Tonight- play badminton.

Tomorrow- watch a soccer match.
B2 –page 144

a) tonight: see a movie
tomorrow: go walking
b) tonight: help my mom
tomorrow: play volleyball

 B4 – page 144

Nga

 Ba 

What/weekend
?

Which/theater?
What / see?
It/ good movie?

see a movie 
 Sao Mai.
 Jurassic Park. 
 I / not / know

 Chain game

- Write the phrases on the
board.

- Ask students to get into
groups of four or five.
- Do the model.

- Look at the board
- Get into groups of four
or five.

- Listen to the teacher.
- Play games.

3.Further practice

- On Saturday morning, I’m going to…
- On Saturday afternoon, I’m going to… 
- On Saturday evening, I’m going to…
- On Suday morning, ………
- On Suday afternoon, ………
- On Suday evening, ………
- Ask students to learn by

heart activities and “Be
going to” to talk about the
near future.

- Have them prepare Unit
14 - Lesson 4: (B5-6) :

Further listening and
reading pracftice with
“Going to”.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the teacher
requests.

4-Homework:

- Activities.

- Be going to (near future).

- Unit 14: Making Plans – FREE TIME 
PLANS - Lesson 4 : (B5 - 6)

*Rót kinh nghiÖm

...
...
...

Period 86

UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS

Lesson 4: FREE TIME PLANS (b5-6)

Date of preparing: …/4/2009
Date of teaching: …/4/2009

I. Aims:

 Further reading and listening practice with “going to”.

II. Objective:

 At the end, students can use “going to” more fluently.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cassette and Poster.

</div>
(181)<div class='page_container' data-page=181>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

 Survey

- Have them tell about
themselves and talk to their
friends about their activities.

- Let them practice with their
partners:

+ What are you going to do
tonight?

+ I’m going to do my
homework.

- Feedback.

- Try to tell about their
activities and ask their
friends about theirs.
- Practice with partners.
- Tell the teacher what they
have asked their partner,
e.g: Nam is going see his
friend tonight. He’s going to
have a picnic on Saturday.
On Sun day, He’s going to
play volleyball. He’s going
to visit Ha Noi in the
summer vacation.

to-night
on

Satur-day?
on

Sun-day
in 
the 
sum 
mer 
vaca
-tion
Me
do
home
-work

Part-ner 1

Part-ner 2
Elicit vocabulary
Translation
Visual
Translation

- Listen to teacher .
- Repeat after the teacher.
- Notice the Vietnamese
translation.

- Copy in their notebook.

1-Vocabulary:

- to bring(v): mang
- a camera(n): m¸y ¶nh
- to take a photo: chơp ¶nh

Pre Questions

 Set the sence:
Minh and his friends are
going to have a picnic.Read
the questions and answer.

- Read the questions and
answer.

Where are they going to visit?
What three things are they going to
bring?

What are they going to to there?
- Get students to check their

predicted answers. - Students check their
predicted answers.

2-Reading:

 Answers

- near a lake - take photos

- a camera, food and drink

 Brainstorm

- Set up the sence: Vui and 
her four friends are planning 
a camping. Guess what they 
are going to bring.

- Ask students to think of
things they are going to
bring.

- Get them to go to the board
and write down their ideas.
- Give feedback.

- Listen to the teacher.
- Students to think of things
Vui and her friends are
going to bring.

- Go to the board and write
down their idea.

3- listening:

warm clothes
 drink a tent

things to bring
a kite

food

- Let students lissten to the
tape and check their
predictions

- Students listen to the tape

and check their predictions. B6 – page 145 Answers

- Vui: a tent, some food – Lan: a
ball

- Ly: a camera – Mai&Nga: some
drink

 Lucky numbers
- Write the numbers on the
board.

- Divide class into teams. The
teams take turn to choose the
numbers.

- Tell students that they have

to answer the questions .

- Look at the board.
- Work in teams.

- Take turn to choose the
numbers.

- Listen to the teacher
carefully.

- Answer the questions.

4.-Further practice:

1 2 3 4 5
6

7 8 9 10 11
12

1Name two people who / bring
cameras

2Name two people who / bring food.
4 Where is the boy’s picnic going to
be?

6 Where are the girls going to go
ca…?

7Name three people who / some
drinks.

8What’s Lan going to bring?
10Who’s going to bring a tent?
11How many days are the girls
/camp?

3 – 5 – 9 – 12 : Lucky numbers
- Ask students to learn by - Take notes and memorize 5.Homework:

</div>
(182)<div class='page_container' data-page=182>

heart activities and “Be going
to” to talk about the near
future.

- Have them prepare Unit 14
- Lesson 4: (B5-6) : Further
listening and reading pracftice
with “Going to”.

- Do home as the teacher
requests.

- Activities.

- Be going to (near future).
 - Exercises in the workbook on
page

112, 113,114.

- Unit 14: Making Plans – FREE

TIME PLANS - Lesson 4 : (B5 - 6)

*Rót kinh nghiÖm

...
...
...

Period 87

UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS
Lesson 5: SUGGESTIONS (C1-3)

Date of preparing: …/4/2009
Date of teaching: …/4/2009

I. Aims:

 Making suggestions with “Let’s……….” and responding; further practice in “want to (do).

II. Objective:

 At the end,students might use “Going to” to talk about vacation plans.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cassette and Textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

 Brainstorm

- Ask students to tell the names of
the intresting places in Viet Nam
which they’d like to visit during
summer vocation.

- Get them to go to the board and
write down their ideas.

- Give feedback.

- Listen to the teacher.
- Tell the names of the
interesting places in
Viet Nam.

- Go to the board and
write down their idea.

Ha Long
 Da lat
Elicit vocabulary
Translation
Picture
Translation
Situation

- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main stress
pattern.

- Write the new words in
their notebooks.

1-Vocabulary:

- a pagoda: chïa
- by bus: b»ng xe buýt
- too # very: rÊt
- too far: qu¸ xa

 Rub out and remember
-Point to the Vietnamese translations
and rub out English words.

- Get students to call the English
words.

- Students repeat
chorally and remember
all the English words.
- Call the English words
and write the English
words if there is time.

 Checking vocabulary:

Pre Questions

 Set the sence:

Ba, Lan and their friends are going to
go an interesting place in the

vacation. Let answer the two
questions below.

Where are they going to go?
How are they going to travel?

Presentation dialogue

- Show students the dialogue.

- Ask them to play the roles of Ba
and Lan.

- Ask students to answer the
questions.

- Ask students to isolate the model
sentence by Asking them some
questions;

+ What is Ba going to do this 
summer vacation?

- Students read the
dialogue in C1 on page
147 in pairs.

- Make the questions to
isolate the model
sentence:

-How muchbeef do you

want?

-How many eggs do you

want?

2-Reading comprehension

 C1 on page 147

a) going to Hue. e) By bike.
go to huong pagoda.

c) Walk there f) It’s too hot.
d) It’s too far. g) By

minibus.
Form:
- Let’s + Vinf

- Why don’t we + Ving……?

</div>
(183)<div class='page_container' data-page=183>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

+ I am going to visit Hue.
 + Where is he going to stay?
 + He is going to stay with his aunt

nad uncle.

- What about + Ving…….?
- Yes, let’s / That’s a good idea
-Yes. Good idea / No, Let’s not.
- Chúng ta hãy / Tại sao

chúng ta không? / Còn về thì
sao?

- Nói lời đề nghị làm việc gì.
 Picture drill

- Run through the pictures.

- Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:

+Let s go swimming.’

+ Yes, let s.’

- Do the same for the seccond
picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat it chorally and
then individually.
- Make the sentence for
themselves.

- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs practice in
front.

3. Practice:

- C3 on page 148-149:
a) go swimming
b) go to the musium
c) play volleyball
d) go to the zoo
e) play badminton
f) go camping

 Mapped dialogue

- Put the dialogue on the board which
is only words. The words are cues.
- Model the dialogue.

- Run through the cues like a drill
with the whole class.

- Look at the board and
listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Practice the dialogue
in pair .

- Some pairs practice in
front.

- Rewrite the dialogue .

4.Further practice:

You

 Your friend 

-see a movie.
- no… too
hot. museum
no / go by
mini - bus

X / beach

Yes / walk.
Yes.
- Ask students to learn vocabulary

and how to talk about vacation plans.
- Have them prepare Unit 14

L2-A4-5:Reading a text and sequencing

words: first, then, next, after that 
and finally.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the teacher
suggests.

5.Homework:

- Vocabulary.

+Wh + be + S + going to +

V…………?

S + be + going to + V

………

- Unit 14: Making Plans –

VACATION DESTINATIONS -

Lesson: A4 - 5
*Rót kinh nghiÖm

...
...
...

Period 88

Lesson 6: GRAMMAR PRACTICE

Date of preparing: …/4/2009
Date of teaching: …/4/2009

I. Aims:

 Further practice in Present simple, Adverb of frequency, Present progressive, “ Going to”
future, the weather.

II. Objective:

 At the end, students will be able to produce language better.

III. Teaching aids:

 Textbook

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

 Survey

- Have them tell about
themselves and talk to
their friends about their

- Try to tell about their

activities and ask their
friends about theirs.

Name V like…… X …… don’t like
Sports Sea-son Food Drink

</div>
(184)<div class='page_container' data-page=184>

1 lÇn 1 tuÇn
favorite sports.

- Let them practice with
their partners:

+ What sports do you
like?

+ Football.

+ What sports don’t you
like?

+ Swimming.
- Feedback.

 Write it up
- Ask Students to write
about the friends they have
interviewed using 3rd

person singular.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Practice with partners.
- Tell the teacher what
they have asked their
partner, e.g: Ha likes
football but he doesn’t like
swimming………?

- Students write about the
friends they have

interviewed using 3rd

person singular.
- Write individually.

1. Ha
Foot-ball x

swim-ming x

2.

3.

- “ Ha likes football but he doesn’t
like swimming ………”

 Slap the board
- Put the Vietnamese
translation on the board.
- Call two students of two
teams to the front of the
class.

- Call out one of English
words in loud voice.

 Nought and crosses
- Put the grid on the board.
- Divide class into teams.
One is noughts (O) and the
other is Crosses (X).
- Two teams choose any
words in the boxes and ask
questions about feelings .
- The team which has
three noughts or three
crosses on a line will win
the game.

 Group works.
- Say the Vietnamese
translation .

- Run forward and slap the
correct words on the

board.

- Continue until students
have slapped all the words.
- Look at the board.

- Work in groups.

- One is noughts (O) and
the other is Crosses (X).
- Choose any words in the
boxes, ask and ask
questions about feelings :
+How often do you go to
the movies?

+Twice a year.

2.. Adverbs of frequency:

TV? the movies? the store?
swimming? your mom? fishing?
table

tennis? camping? Badmin-ton?

 Word cue drill
- Run through the cues.
- Hold up the first cues and
say the model sentences.
- Today, Hung’s on
vacation.

+ Hung usually gets up at
6.

+ That’s right, but today
he’s getting up at 7
- Do the same for the
second cue.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the cues.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat it chorally and
then individually.
- Make the sentence for
themselves.

- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs practice in
front.

3. Present Progressive:

- get up at 6 / get up at 7

- go to school / go camping

- study / not study

- have rice for lunch / have a picnic
- walk home / walk in the mountain

 Picture drill
- Run through the
pictures.

- Hold up the first picture
and say the model

sentences:

+What are they going to
do?

+ They’re going to play
soccer

- Do the same for the
seccond picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat it chorally and
then individually.
- Make the sentence for
themselves.

- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs practice in
front.

4. Future (Going to):

a) play soccer
b) play tennis
c) go camping
d) go swimming
e) watch TV
f) cook

5. What ‘ s the weather like?

thØnh tho¶ng

luân luân

</div>
(185)<div class='page_container' data-page=185>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

 Lucky numbers
- Write the numbers on the
board.

- Divide class into teams.
The teams take turn to
choose the numbers.
- Tell students that they
have to answer the
questions .

- Look at the board.
- Work in teams.

- Take turn to choose the
numbers.

- Listen to the teacher
carefully.

- Answer the questions.

1 2 3 4 5 6
1 Lucky number.

2 -b What’s the weather like in the
summer?

3 - d What’s the weather like in the
winter?

4 Lucky number.

5 - c What’s the weather like in the fall?

6 -a What’s the weather like in the
spring?

 Find someone who
- Put the table on the
board.

- Get students to get into
groups.

- Get students to ask each
other questions.

+ Teacher: What are you
going to do this evening?
+ Student (Mai): I’m
going to watch

TV………..

- Correct if there are any
mistakes.

- Feedback.

- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.
- Stand up and ask each
orther questions. When
they find someone who
says “Yes” they fill in the
name. They can’t fill in
someone’s name more
than once.

- Tell the teacher what
they have found, e.g. “
Mai is going to watch TV.
Tomorrow, She’s going to
do her homework. She’s
going…

5 .Future plans:

Name What are you going to doThis ……..?
eve tomor-row Week-end Vaca-tion

Mai watch

TV do
home-work

have a
pic.. visitHue

- Ask students to review
vocabulary and Grammar
points (Unit12 – Unit14)
and exercises in the
exercise book from Unit
12 to Unit 14 .

- Have them prepare
FORTY-FIVE MINUTE
TEST .

- Review vocabulary and
Grammar points (Unit12
– Unit14) and exercises
in the exercise book from
Unit 12 to Unit 14 .
- Prepare FORTY-FIVE
MINUTE TEST.

6.Homework:

- Vocabulary and Grammar points
(Unit12 – Unit14).

- Exercises in the exercise book from
Unit 12 to Unit 14.

- FORTY-FIVE MINUTE TEST.

*Rót kinh nghiÖm

...
...
...

Period 89

FORTY- FIVE MINUTE TEST

Date of preparing: …/4/2009
Date of testing: …/4/2009

A. Aim:

 Help students revise grammar points and vocabulary from Unit 12 to Unit 14.

B. Content:

Đề a
I-LISTEN AND ANSWERB THE QUESTIONS (2.0MS).

1. How old is Nam? ………

2. Where does he live? ………

3. What does he do in his free time? ………
4. What is he going to do next Sunday? ………

II. CHOOSE THE BEST CORRECT ANSWERS (2.0MS)

1. She is going to ………the citadel.

a. visits b. visit c. to visit d. visiting
2 …………he play basketball? No, he doesn’t.

a. Do b. Is c. Does d. Are
3. Does Nga ………to the zoo every Sunday?-Yes, she does.

</div>
(186)<div class='page_container' data-page=186>

a. goes b. go c.going d. to go
4. What are they doing?-They are ……….to music.

a. listen b. listening c. listens d.to listen
5. ………. is Hoa doing? She is reading.

a. where b. what c.how d. when
6. Mai is ……… ……….up now.

a. gets b. getting c. get d. geting

7. ………..are you going to stay?- In a hotel.

a. Where b. What c. How d. Who
8 ………..much meat does Lan want? A kilo.

a . who b. how c. what d. Which

III. CHOOSE THE CORRECT WORD TO FILL IN THE BLANK (2.0MS

She learning day my

My name is Quang. I’m eleven years old. I’m in grade six. I’m in class 6 A. I am
……….English now in my room . Every ……… I learn speaking, listening, reading and
writing. ………English teacher is very kind to us. ……… always helps us much in our
studies

IV-READ THE PASSAGE CAREFULLY
Read the passage and do the exercises:

Thu and her friends are going to have a picnic in Sapa. The weather is fine and cold. Thu is
going to bring a camera to take some photos.Lan is going to bring some food. Nam is going to
bring some drinds. Minh is going to bring a blanket.

1. Write True (T) or False (F)(1M):

_____ a. The weather is fine and cold.
_____ b. Thu is going to bring some food.
2. Answer the questions below(2M):

a. Where are they going to have a picnic ?

_____________________________________________
b. Is the weather fine and cold?

______________________________________________

V -ANSWER THESE QUESTIONS (1M)

1. What do you do in your free time?

………
2. what are you going to do tonight?

………
Đề b

I-LISTEN AND ANSWERB THE QUESTIONS (2.0MS).

1. Which class is Nam in? ………

2. Where does he live? ………

3. What is he doing now? ………

4. What is he going to do next Sunday? ………

II. CHOOSE THE BEST CORRECT ANSWERS (2.0MS)

1. She is going to ………Hanoi

a. visits b. visit c. to visit d. visiting
2 …………he play basketball? Yes, he does.

a. Do b. Is c. Does d. Are
3. Does Nam ………to the zoo every Sunday?-Yes, he does.

</div>
(187)<div class='page_container' data-page=187>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

4. What is he doing?-He is ……….to music.

a. listen b. listening c. listens d.to listen
5. ………. is Mai doing? - She is reading.

a. where b. what c.how d. when
6. Tuan is ……….up now.

a. gets b. getting c. get d. geting

7. ………..is he going to stay?- In a hotel.

a. Where b. What c. How d. Who
8 ………..many eggs does Lan want? A dozen.

a . who b. how c. what d. Which

III. CHOOSE THE CORRECT WORD TO FILL IN THE BLANK (2.0MS

She learning day my

IV-READ THE PASSAGE CAREFULLY
Read the passage and do the exercises:

Thu and her friends are going to have a picnic in Sapa. The weather is fine and cold. Thu is
going to bring a camera to take some photos. Lan is going to bring some food. Nam is going to

bring some drinds. Minh is going to bring a blanket.

1. Write True (T) or False (F)(1M):

_____ a. Thu and her friends are going to go camping in Sapa.
_____ b. The weather is fine and cold.

2. Answer the questions below(2MS):

a. Where are they going to have a picnic ?

_____________________________________________
b. Is the weather fine and cold?

______________________________________________

V -ANSWER THESE QUESTIONS (1M)

1-What do you do in your free time?
2-what are you going to do tonight?

*Rót kinh nghiƯm

...
...
...

Period 90

Trả bài kiểm tra

Date of preparing: …/4/2009
Date of testing: …/4/2009

1. Ma trËn:

Néi dung NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiĨu VËn dơng Tæng sè:

KQ TL KQ TL KQ TL

I. Listening 4

0.5

2.0

II. Reading 2

0.5 2 1.0 4 3.0

III. Language focus 8 4 12

</div>
(188)<div class='page_container' data-page=188>

0.25 0.5 4.0

IV. Writing 2

0.5 2 1.0

Tæng sè: 2

1.0 8 2.0 4 2.0 2 2.0 6 3.0 10.0

2-KÕt qu¶:

Líp/sÜ sè 0 -<2.0 2.0 -<5.0 5.0 -<6.5 6.5 -<8.0 8.0 – 10.0

SL % SL % SL % SL % SL %

6A
6B
6C

3- Nhận xét
*Ưu điểm:

*Nh

ợc điểm:

*Những lỗi th ờng gặp

*Biện pháp:

Period 91

UNIT 15: COUNTRIES

Lesson 1: WE ARE THE WORLD (A1- A4)

Date of preparing: 10/4/2009
Date of testing: 11/4/2009

I. Aims:

 Present Countries, Nationlities and Languages vocabulary to talk about where

people are from.

II. Objective:

 Students can introduce their nationality and langauge and ask others about these.

III. Teaching aids:

 Poster and cassette.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

 Brainstorm

</div>
(189)<div class='page_container' data-page=189>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

some country names .
- Get them to go to the board
and write down their ideas.
- Give feedback.

some coutry names.
- Go to the board and
write down their idea.

Counties
USA

China

Elicit vocabulary

 Translation
 Explanation
 Situation
 Translation
 Use the

pictures

to work out the country
names in Vietnamese.

- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the main stress
pattern.

- Write the new words in
their notebooks.

1- Vocabulary:

- the world: thế giới
- a country: quốc gia.
- a nationality: quốc tịch
- to speak: nói tiếng.

-Canada/France/China/theUSA/Jap
an /Great Britain/Australia/Viet
Nam

 Slap the board

- Put the Vietnamese
translation on the board.
- Call two students of two
teams to the front of the
class.

- Call out one of English
words in loud voice.

 Group works.

- Say the Vietnamese
translation .

- Run forward and slap
the correct words on the
board.

- Continue until students
have slapped all the
words.
 quốc tịch 
Thế giới 
Pháp
Nhật
quốc gia
Úc
Presenation Text

- Let students to listen to the
cassette and repeat.

- Introduce oneself and
others:

+ I’m (teacher’s name). I’m
from Viet Nam . And this is
John. He ‘s from the USA.

- Ask some students some
questions and to introduce
the Wh-question “Where is
…… from?” and the answer
“He / She’s from …………”.
- Point to the questions and
answer to get students to
isolate the model sentences .

- Listen to the cassette
and repeat.

- Pay attention to the
teacher.

- Introduce themselves
and others .

- Answer the teacher’s
questions

- Give the form, meaning
and use.

2-Model sentences

- Where are you from?

- I’m from Viet Nam.
 - Where is she from?
 - She e is from France

 Form

- Where is / are + S + from?

- S + am / is / are + from + tên
nước

 Use

- …………từ đâu đến?
 - Hỏi quê quán .

Nought and crosses

- Put the grid on the board.
- Divide class into teams.
One is noughts (O) and the
other is Crosses (X).

- Two teams choose any
words in the boxes and ask
questions about county

- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.

- One is noughts (O) and
the other is Crosses (X).
- Choose any words in the
boxes, ask and ask
questions about country
names :

3.Practice:

Trường THCS TT Đồng Văn Hoàng Văn Tuyên189

Laur
a

Mari

e Lee
John YOU Yoko

</div>
(190)<div class='page_container' data-page=190>

names

- The team which has three
noughts or three crosses on a
line will win the game.

+ Laura .

+Where’s Laura from?
+She’s from Canada .

- Read the sentences and ask
them to listen attentively.
- Ask them to retell Minh’s
introduce.

- Write the them on the
board and get students to
isolate the model sentences

 Substitution drill

- Let them listen to the
cassette and repeat.

+ Minh is from Viet Nam.
He speaks Vietnamese.
 + Yoko

- Listen to the teacher
attentively.

+ My name’s Minh. I’m 
from Viet Nam. I speak 
Vietnamese.

+ Minh is from Viet Nam. 
He speaks Vietnamese.

- Write in the form in the
notesbooks.

- Listen to the cassette.
+ Minh is from Viet 
Nam. He speaks 
Vietnamese.

+ Yoko is from Japan. 
She speaks Japanese.

 - A2 – A3,page 155:

- My name’s Minh.

- I’m from Viet Nam. 
 - I speak Vietnamese.

- Minh is from Viet Nam.

- He speaks Vietnamese.

- I speak + language(tieáng).

-He/She+speaks+language (tieáng)

- A3,page 155:

- Minh - Laura
 - Yoko

- Lee
 - Bruce
 - Susan

 Mapped dialogue

- Put the dialogue on the
board which is only words.
The words are cues.

- Model the dialogue.

- Run through the cues like a
drill with the whole class.

- Look at the board and
listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Practice the dialogue in
pair .

- Some pairs practice in
front.

- Rewrite the dialogue .

4.Further practice: A4 – page 156
 Thu

 Chi 

-Who / that?
-Where / from?

-What/nationa-lity

-Which/lang…?

Susan

Great Britain
British.
English

- Ask students to learn
vocabulary and how to
introduce their nationality
and language and ask others
about these.

- Have them prepare Unit 15
– L2- A5: Writing a
postcard about being on
vacation.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the teacher
suggests.

5.Homework:

- Countries, nationalities and
languages vocabulary.

-Where +is / are+S+from?

- S + am / is / are + country name.
 - I + speak +language (tieáng)

- He / She + speaks + language
(tieáng)

- Unit 15: Country – WE ARE THE
WORLD - Lesson 2: A5

*Rót kinh nghiÖm

</div>
(191)<div class='page_container' data-page=191>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Period 92

UNIT 15: COUNTRIES

Lesson 2: WE ARE THE WORLD (A5 – A6)

Date of preparing: …/4/2009
Date of testing: …/4/2009

I. Aims:

 Writing a postcard about being on vacation.

II. Objective:

 Students can write postcards to their friends.

III. Teaching aids:

 Postcard and textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

 Picture

- Show them pictures of
some famous people ans ask
them about their countries
and nationalties.

+ Where is he from?
 + What’s his nationality?

- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher’s
questions and answer about
their countries and
nationalities.

+ He’s from Viet Nam.
 + He’s Vietnamese.

- Uncle Ho

- Lenin

Elicit vocabulary

 Realia
 Situation
 Synonym
 Situation
 Translation

- Listen to teacher .

- Repeat after the teacher.
- Notice the Vietnamese
translation.

- Copy in their notebook.

1-Vocabulary:

- a postcard: bưu thiếp
- wet: ẩm ướt

- a lot of = many: nhieàu

- interesting places: những nơi
thú vị

- to be on vacation: nghæ

 Rub out and remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat chorally
and remember all the
English words.

- Call the English words
and write the English words
if there is time.

- Show students the postcard.
- Read the postcard aloud.
- Mention the situation when
the writer write the postcard.
- Ask questions to elicit the
content of the postcard.

- Look at the postcard
shown by the teacher.
- Read the postcard.

- Listen to the teacher’s
emphasis.

- Try to answer the
questions about the content
of the poatcard.

 - A5 – page 156:
 1. Who’s the postcard from?
2. Where is he?

3. What’s the weather like?
4. Is he traveling by train?
5. What’s he going to do
tomorrow?

6. Who’s he the postcard?
7. Where’s he?

 Grid

- Explain how to work on the
exercise: These are cities and
intersting places of some
countries: Japan, Vietnam,

- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat the words aftre the
teacher.

- Work in teams to put the

Country City In .place
Japan Tokyo FujiamaM

Vietnam Hue Th.Citade

</div>
(192)<div class='page_container' data-page=192>

The USA … . Now work in
teams to put them in two
columns

+ Where are you ?

+I’m in Japan.I’m visiting
Tokyo.

+What are you goin to do
tomorrow?

+ I’m going to visit M.Fuj..

words in two columns.
- Use the Grid as cues to
ask questions and answer.

l

The USA YorkNew Statue ofThe
Liberty

China Beijing The GreatWall

Australi

a Sydney BeachBondi

France Paris The EiffelTown

 Transformation Writing

-Divide students into 6 groups
-Help students write their
postcards in groups. Explain
how a postcard is written.
…………

Dear ………,

I’m on vacation in London.
The weather is ……… .

- Work in groups

- Write their postcards in
groups.

- Listen attentively.

2-While Writing:

 A5 - page 156

- Group 1: Postcard from Japan

- Group 2: Postcard from VietNam

- Group 3: Postcard from The
USA

- Group 4: Postcard from China
- Group 5: Postcard from
Australia

- Group 6: Postcard from France

 Correction

- Ask some students to read
their postcards aloud.

- Correct if there are any
mistakes.

- Encourage the good
students to put more details in
their postcards if possible.

- Sme students read their
postcards aloud.

- Correct the mistakes if
there is any.

- Try to write as many
sentences as possible.

3.Post writing:

 Suggested postcard
 Dear Minh,

I’m on vcation in Beijing . The
weather is cold.

I’m traveling by car and writing
a lot of interesting places.

Tomorrow, I’m giong to visit The
Great Wall of Beijing

Love,
 Nga

- Ask students to learn by
heart vocabulary and how to
write a postcard.

- Have them do exercises on
page 124, 125,126 in the
workbook and prepare Unit

15 - Lesson 1: (B1) :
Comparative and
Superlative..

- Take notes and memorize
- Do homework as the
teacher requests.

4.Homework:

- Vocabulary.
- A postcard..

- Exercises on page 124,
125,126 in the workbook.

- Unit 15: Countries – CITIES, 
BUILDING AND PEOPLE -
Lesson 3 : (B1)

*Rót kinh nghiƯm

</div>
(193)<div class='page_container' data-page=193>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

Period 93

UNIT 15: COUNTRIES

Lesson 3: CITIES, BUILDINGS AND PEOPLE (B1,4)

Date of preparing: …/4/2009

Date of testing: …/4/2009

I. Aim:

 Comparing places using comparative and superlative adjectives of one syllable.

II. Objective:

 At the end,students can compare things.

III. Teaching aids:

 Cassette and Textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

Matching

- Write the words on the
board.

- Get students to come up to
the board to match .

- Check

- Look at the board.
- Work in teams

- Come up to the board then
match .

- Check.

1. Revision:

hot Hue
HCMC
small

wet Hoi An
Sapa
big Hanoi
Long Xuyen
cold

Presentation pictures

- Show students the pictures in
B1 on page 158, ask them to
observe and tell about each
thing.

- Write the words on the board
and ask them to repeat.

- Let students observe the
three different adjectives. Ask

them to say what the
difference is and give the
formation of the comparative
and superlative form.

- Let students copy the models
and the formations, and
memorize.

- Look at the pictures and
tell the teacher about the
different of things
presented.

- Look at the board and
repeat the new words as the
teacher requested.

- Observe and notice the
difference of the phrases
given.

- Take notes and learn by
heart.

2 .Presentation: 
 A1 on page 158
 + a big building
 + a bigger building.
 + the biggest building

+ a small house
 + a smaller house
 + the smallest house

* Form:

Comparative 
 form of 
short 
 
adjectives

Superlative 
 form of 
short 
 adject

ives
Short ADJ +

ER

The + Short
ADJ + EST

- In the superlative form, the 
definite article THE is written 
before the adjective.

Word cue drill

- Run through the cues.

- Hold up the first cues and
say the model sentences.

S1: Hanoi is bigger than
Danang

S2: But HCMC is the biggest.

- Do the same for the second

- Look at the cues.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat it chorally and then
individually.

- Make the sentence for
themselves.

- Practice in pairs.

3. Practice:

- Da Nang / Hanoi / HCMC /
big

- Vinh / Long Xuyen / Hoi
An / small

- Hanoi / Can Tho / Hue / wet

</div>
(194)<div class='page_container' data-page=194>

cue.

- Correct their mistakes. - Some pairs practice infront. - Ben Tre / Tra Vinh / Ha Tinh
/ hot

- Hanoi / Uong Bi / Sapa / cold

Answer given

- Put the short answers on the
board.

- Get students to ask questions
and answer.

+ S1: What’s the tallest
mountain in Vietnam?

+ S2: Phanxipan.

- Do the same for the second
cue.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Read the sentences.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat it chorally and then
individually.

- Make the questions .
- Practice in pairs.

- Some pairs practice in
front.

3. Further practice:

- Phanxipang. - Ha
Tinh

- The Mekong.

- Hue.
- Sapa.

- HCMC
- Ask students to learn

vocabulary and comparative /
superlative adjectives.

- Have them prepare Unit 15
L4-B2-5:Reading facts about
famous places in the world and
practicing comparatives.

- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher
suggests.

5.Homework:
 - Vocabulary.
+Short ADJ + ER

+ The + Short ADJ + EST

- Unit 15: Counties – CITIES, 
BUILDING AND PEOPLE -
Lesson 4 : (B2 – B5)

*Rót kinh nghiƯm

...
...
...

Period 94

UNIT 15: COUNTRIES

Lesson 4: NATURAL FEATURES (C1 , C2)

Date of preparing: …/4/2009
Date of testing: …/4/2009

I. Aim:

 “A lot of ……..” as a quantifier with Geography vocabulary to describe Vietnam.

II. Objective:

 Students can use “ a lot of ……..”.

III. Teaching aids:

 Pictures and textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

Slap the board

- Put English words on the
board.

- Call two students of two
teams to the front of the
class.

Group works.

- Say Enghlish words
.

- Run forward and slap
the correct words on
the board.

1. Revision:

moutains

beautiful

fields

beaches

</div>
(195)<div class='page_container' data-page=195>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

- Call out one of the
Vietnamese translation in
loud voice.

- Continue until
students have slapped
all the words.

lakes

Elicit vocabulary

 Translation
 Translation
 Synonym
 Explanation

- Listen to teacher .
- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the
Vietnamese

translation.

- Copy in their
notebook.

2 .Pre writing: 
 * Vocabulary:
 - a forest: rừng
- a desert: sa mạc

- a lot of = lots = many: nhiều
- great (adj): to lớn

Rub out and remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat
chorally and remember
all the English words.
- Call the English
words and write the
English words if there
is time.

* Checking vocabulary:

Presentation text

- Show students the text and
let them to the cassette and
repeat.

- Ask some students to read
aloud and ask them:

+ What are there 6 “natural

peatuers Lan tells us about?

- Show them a picture of a
desert and ask them if they
know why there isn’t a desert
in Viet Nam.

- Ask them to give the
formation of “ a lot of..”.
- Let students copy the
models and the formations,
and memorize.

- Listen to the cassette
and repeat.

- Some students read
the text aloud and
answer:

+ mountains, rivers,
lakes, rain, forests,
beaches.

- Look at the picture of
a desert and answer
the question :
“Because we have
lotsof rain / the country
very green, we have big

forest, a lot of lakes
and rivers”.

- Take notes and learn
by heart.

2 .Presentation: 
 C1 on page 162 – 163

we have lots of rain / the country 
very green, we have big forest, a lot of 
lakes and rivers”

LOTS OF / A LOT OF + C . 
NOUN /

UNC.NOUN.

- Sau Lots of / a lot of là danh từ 
không đếm được hoặc danh từ điếm 
được số nhiều.

Picture drill

- Run through the pictures.
- Hold up the first picture and
say the model sentences:

+What are they going to do?
+ They’re going to play

- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat it chorally
and then individually.
- Make the sentence
for themselves.

3. Practice:

a) mountains
b) rivers
c) lakes
d) rain

</div>
(196)<div class='page_container' data-page=196>

soccer

- Do the same for the seccond
picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Practice in pairs.
- Some pairs practice
in front.

e) forests
f) beaches

g) deserts

Write it up

- Write the words on the
board.

- Get students to come up to
the board to match the cities
with natural features .

- Check

- Get students use the cues to
write a passage about natural
features in Viet Nam.

- Look at the board.
- Work in teams

- Come up to the board
then match .

- Check.

- Write a passage
about natural features
in Viet Nam.

3. Further practice:

- Lai Chau forests
- Can Tho beaches
- Hai Noi mountains
- Pleiku rice fields
- Da Nang river
- Hue lake

- Quang Ninh rain

My country is very beautiful and in 
teresting. In Lai Chau there are lots 
of ...
... .

- Ask students to learn by
heart vocabulary and “lots
of”

- Have them prepare Unit 15
- Lesson 6: (C2 - 3) :
Reading a text about the
world’s great rivers and
mountains………

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do as the teacher
requests.

5.Homework:
 - Vocabulary.
- Lots of / a lot of..

- Unit 15: Countries – NATURAL 
FEATURE - Lesson 6 : (C2 – 3)

*Rót kinh nghiƯm

...
...
...

Period 95

UNIT 15: COUNTRIES

Lesson 5: NATURAL FEATURES (C3 , C4)

Date of preparing: …/4/2009
Date of testing: …/4/2009

I-Aim:

 Reading about the world’s great rivers and mountains to skim for details and get

further practice in using comparatives superlatives.

II. Objective:

 At the end, students can understand the text and use comparatives and

superatives better.

III. Teaching aids:

 Textbook and poster.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

Word Square

- Write the word of the

- Look at the word of

</div>
(197)<div class='page_container' data-page=197>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

square on the board.
- Tell the students what
the topic is and how many
hidden words are there.
- Get the students to come
to the board and circle any
words they can see.

- Listen to the teacher
and answer the teacher
questions.

+ There are 19 hidden
workds

- Come to the board and
circle any words they
can see.

M S T A R T S H
E L B E A C H I
T R E E I G I N
E I R O N E G A
R G L O T S H O
S D L R O W X F
 great, long meters, rain, high, China
 river, star, beach, tree, lots

world girl
Elicit vocabulary

 Mine
 Visual
 Translation
 Translation

- Listen to teacher .

- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the Vietnamese
translation.

- Copy in their notebook.

2 .Pre - reading:
 Vocabulary:

- to flow to : chaûy ra
- the sea : biển.
- Tibet : Tây Tạng
- North Africa : Baéc Phi

Rub out and remember

-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.

- Get students to call the
English words.

- Students repeat
chorally and remember
all the English words.
- Call the English words
and write the English

words if there is time.

* Checking vocabulary:

True or False statements

- Set the sence: You are
going to read about some
great rivers and mountains
in the world. Now work in
pairs and guess about the
text .

- Hang th poster of
statements o the board and
ask them guess which
statements are true and
which are false.

- Listen to the
teacher.

- Guess which is
the biggest city in
the world? Put
the cities in
order: biggest
first..

1. There are two great river in Viet Nam
 2. The Red River is longer than the 
Mekong River.

3. The Red River and the Mekong River 
both star in China

4. The longest river in the world is not in
Viet Nam

5. Phanxipang is the highest mountain in
the world

- Get students to read the
text and check.

- Ask students to read the
text carefully and answer
the questions.

Lucky numbers

- Write the numbers on the
board.

- Divide class into teams.
The teams take turn to

- Read the text and
check.

- Read the text carefully
and answer the
questions.

- Look at the board.
- Work in teams.

2.While reading: 
 C3 – p 165

1. T 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. F
* Comprehension questions: C3

1 2 3 4 5 
 6 7 8 9 10 
2 Which is the longest river in VN?
3 Where does the Mekong River star?
4 Which is the highest mountain in the 
world?

6Which is the longest river in the world?
7Which sea does the Nile River flow to?

</div>
(198)<div class='page_container' data-page=198>

choose the numbers.
- Tell students that they
have to answer the
questions .

- Take turn to choose the

numbers.

- Listen to the teacher
carefully.

- Answer the questions.

8 Which is the highest mountain in the 
world?

10 How thick is the Great Wall?
1 - 5 - 9 - 10 : Lucky numbers

Speak

- Let some pairs practice
asking and answering
about these rivers and
mountains with Wh –
questions.

- Let them do some more
practice on other rivers
and mountains they know.

- Some pairs practice
asking and answering
before the class, using
Wh – questions.

- Do some free practice
with other rivers and
mountains in Viet Nam
or others countries

4.Post reading:

- Wh – Questions: What, where, 
 which, how…………

- Ask students to learn by
heart vocabulary and

comparatives and

superlatives.

- Have them do Exercises
from page 127 to 129 in
the workbook and prepare
Unit 16 - Lesson 1:

(A1&3) : Countable and
uncountable quantifiers.

- Take notes and
memorize

- Do homework as the
teacher requests.

5.Homework:
 - Vocabulary.

- Comparatives and Superlatives
 - Exercises from page 127 to 129 in
the workbook.

- Unit 16: Man And The 
Environment – ANIMAL AND PLANTS

- Lesson 1 : (A1 & 3)
*Rót kinh nghiƯm

...
...
...

Period 96

UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
Lesson 1: ANIMALS AND PLANS (A1 & A3)

Date of preparing: …/4/2009
Date of testing: …/4/2009

I. Aim:

 Countable and uncountable quantifiers: a lot, a little, a few to talk about Food.

II. Objective:

 Students can use a lot, a little, a few to talk about Food.

III. Teaching aids:

 Pictures and cassette.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

Jumbled words

-Write numbers whose letters
are in disorder.

- Divide the class into two

-Look at the board.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Work in teams.

1. Revision:

- toespota =
potatoes

</div>
(199)<div class='page_container' data-page=199>

Giáo án Tiếng anh 6 Năm học 2009 -2010

teams.

- Ask students from each team
to go to the board and write the
correct words .

- Go to the board and write
the correct words. (One word,
one student).

- gegs = eggs
- motatoes =

tomatoes

- icer = rice
- nonios = onions
- tableveges =
vegetables

Presentation picture

- Use pictures and some real
things as chalk, pens, books,
water to identify the meaning
and usage of the quantifiers

some, a few, a little, a lot of.
- Let students listen and
repeat : some rice, a lot of rice,
a little rice, some eggs, a lot of
eggs, a few eggs

- Ask them to give the
formation of “ a lot of…………..”.
- Have them take note.

- Look at what the teacher
show and notice the meaning
as well as the usage of the
quantifiers some, a few, a
little, a lot of.

- Listen and repeat

- Take notes and learn by
heart.

2. Presentation:

- some eggs 
some rice

- a lot of eggs a lot
of rice

- a few eggs a

little rice

* Some / a lot of / a little / a 
few:

Some / a lot of / a few + 
Plural Noun

Some / a lot of / a little + 
Unc Noun

- Some: 1 vaøi
 - A lot of: nhieàu
 - A few / a little: 1 ít
Picture drill

- Run through the pictures.
- Hold up the first picture and
say the model sentences:

+How many potatoes are there?
+ There are a lot.

- Do the same for the seccond
picture.

- Correct their mistakes.

- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.

- Repeat it chorally and then
individually.

- Make the sentence for
themselves.

- Practice in pairs.

- Some pairs practice in front.

3. Practice:

a) a lot of potatoes
b) some tomatoes
c) a lot of onions
d) a few vegetables
e) a little rice
f) some flowers
g) deserts

Chain game

- Write the phrases on the
board.

- Ask students to get into
groups of four or five.

- Do the model.

- Look at the board

- Get into groups of four or
five.

- Listen to the teacher.
- Play games.

4.Further practice: 
- a little rice

- some tomatoes 
- a few eggs

There’s a little rice.
 There’s a little rice and 
some

Tomatoes

………

- Ask students to learn by heart - Take notes and memorize 5.Homework:

</div>
(200)<div class='page_container' data-page=200>

vocabulary and Countable and
uncountable quantifiers.

Have them prepare Unit 16
-Lesson 2: (A2) : Reading a text

about farming and “a lot.”

- Do as the teacher requests. - Vocabulary.

- Lots of / a lot of / a few / a
little

- Unit 16: Man And The 
Environment – ANIMAL 
AND PLANTS - Lesson 2 :

(A2)
 *Rót kinh nghiƯm

...
...
...

Period 97

UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
Lesson 2: ANIMALS AND PLANTS ( A2 )

Date of preparing: …/4/2009
Date of testing: …/4/2009

I. Aim:

 Reading a text about farming and getting further practice in a lot, a little, a few.

II. Objective:

 At the end, students can understand the text and use a lot , a little, a few better.

III. Teaching aids:

 Textbook and poster.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Content on the board

Nought and crosses

- Put the grid on the board.
- Divide class into teams.
One is noughts (O) and the
other is Crosses (X).
- Two teams choose any
words in the boxes and
ask questions about county
names

- The team which has
three noughts or three
crosses on a line will win
the game.

- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.

- One is noughts (O) and
the other is Crosses (X).
- Choose any words in
the boxes, ask and ask
questions about country
names :

+There’s a little rice
+There’re a lot of eggs.

1.Revision:

a dozen

eggs 2 potatoes 2
1

a glass
of milk
2

1
kilo

onions 100g.Rice

4 kilos
vegetables
1 kilo fruit tomatoes2 2 flowers

Elicit vocabulary

 Mine
 Visual
 Translation
 Translation

- Listen to teacher .
- Repeat after the
teacher.

- Notice the Vietnamese
translation.

- Copy in their
notebook.

2 .Pre - reading:
 Vocabulary:

</div>

GA A V 60910

<b>Total Out</b>

<b>Teaching :6a</b>

………..

<b> 6b </b>

...

<b> 6c </b>

………

<b> </b>

<b> English 6 </b>

<b>Total Out</b>

<b>Teaching :6a</b>

………..

<b> 6b </b>

...

<b> 6c </b>

………

<b> </b>

<b>Total Out</b>

<b>Teaching :6a</b>

………..

<b> 6b </b>

...

<b> 6c </b>

………

<b> </b>

<b>Unit 1 ( Cont).</b>

<b>Period 4</b>

: A 5 – 8 (P.12- 13)

<b>Unit 1 ( Cont).</b>

<b>Period 4</b>

: A 5 – 8

(P.12- 13)

<b>Total Out</b>

<b>Teaching :6a</b>

………..

<b> 6b </b>

...

<b> 6c </b>

………

<b> </b>

Unit 1( Cont)

Unit 1( Cont)

Period 5: B 1

<b>–</b>

6

(P.14

<b>–</b>

16)

<b>Total Out</b>

<b>Teaching :6a</b>

………..

<b> 6b </b>

...

<b> 6c </b>

………

Unit 1 ( Cont)

Period 6 : C 1 – 4 ( P.17 – 19)

Unit 1 ( Cont)

<b>Total Out</b>

<b>Teaching :6a</b>

………..

<b> 6b </b>

...

<b> 6c </b>

………

<b> </b>

Unit 1( Cont)

Period 7 : C 5 - 6 ( P.19)

Unit 1( Cont)

Period 7 : C 5 - 6

( P19)

<b>Total Out</b>

<b>Teaching :6a</b>

………..

<b> 6b </b>

...

Unit 2: At school.

Period 8 : A1-4 ( P.20- 22)

Unit 2: At school.